Chrysler 2005 300 Owner`s manual

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
PAGE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 1
1
INTRODUCTION
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
10
INDEX
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 9
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
m Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
m Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
m How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
m Vehicle Modifications / Alterations . . . . . . . . . . 7
m Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
1
4
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer
knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained technicians and genuine Mopart parts, and is interested in
your satisfaction.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the table of contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this owner’s manual:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INTRODUCTION
5
1
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures which could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire manual you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is located near
the left front corner of the windshield. The VIN is visible
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle.
Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle
identification number and optional equipment.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN plate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INTRODUCTION
7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS
1
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety
and may lead to an accident resulting in serious
injury or death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
m A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
▫ Child Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
m Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
m Sentry Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ To Unlock The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
m Illuminated Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
m Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
m Vehicle Theft Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
m Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . .37
m Trunk Lock And Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
m Trunk Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
m Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
m Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . .57
m Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
You can insert the double sided keys into the locks with
either side up.
Ignition Key Removal
The shift lever must be in PARK. Turn the key to the
LOCK position, then remove the key.
The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer. Ask
your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe
place.
NOTE: The power window switches, radio, power
sunroof, and power outlets will remain active for 10
minutes after the ignition switch has been turned off.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time is programmable through the electronic vehicle
information center (EVIC)—if equipped. Refer to Personal Settings in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Section for details.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
12
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only occurs when
the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC positions.
WARNING!
Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could
be injured. Children should be warned not to touch
the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector
lever. Don’t leave the keys in the ignition. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
If you open the driver’s door and the key is in the ignition
switch, a chime will sound to remind you to remove the
key.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized operation of the vehicle by disabling the engine.
The system will shut the engine off after 2 seconds of
running if an invalid key is used to start the vehicle. This
system utilizes ignition keys which have an electronic
chip (transponder) embedded into them. Only keys that
have been programmed to the vehicle can be used to start
and operate the vehicle.
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System does not need to be
armed or activated. Operation of the system is automatic
regardless of whether or not the vehicle is locked or
unlocked. During normal operation, the Theft Alarm/
Immobilizer Light will come on for three (3) seconds
immediately after the ignition switch is turned on for a
bulb check. Afterwards, if the bulb remains on, this
indicates a problem with the electronics.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
same keychain will not cause a key-related (transponder) fault unless the additional part is physically held against the ignition key being used
when starting the vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or
other RF electronics will not cause interference with
this system.
If the bulb begins to flash after the bulb check, this
indicates that an invalid key has been used to start the
vehicle. Both of these conditions will result in the engine
being shut off after two (2) seconds of running.
Keep in mind that a key which has not been programmed
is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the
ignition lock cylinder for that vehicle.
If the Theft Alarm/Immobilizer Light comes on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle has been running for
longer than 10 seconds), a fault has been detected in the
electronics and the vehicle should be serviced as soon as
possible.
NOTE:
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible
with remote starting systems. Use of these systems
may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
• Exxon/Mobil Speed Pass,™ additional Sentry Keys, or
any other transponder equipped components on the
13
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it can
not be programmed to any other vehicle.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four digit PIN number. This number is required
for dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may
be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the
Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure
consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key is one which has never been
programmed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
14
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to the
dealer.
The new Sentry Key has been programmed. The Keyless
Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during this
procedure.
Customer Key Programming
You can program new sentry keys to the system if you
have two valid sentry keys by performing the following
procedure:
Repeat this procedure to program up to a total of 8 keys.
If you do not have a programmed sentry key, contact
your dealer for details.
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s) to
match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no
longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition switch OFF and
remove the first key.
3. Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition
switch ON within 15 seconds. After ten seconds a chime
will sound and the Theft Alarm Light will begin to flash.
Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds. After 10
seconds a single chime will sound. The Theft Alarm Light
will stop flashing, turn on for 3 seconds; then turn off.
NOTE: If a programmed key has been lost, see your
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the systems memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting
your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at
the time of service to be reprogrammed.
General Information
The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the keyless
entry transmitter or open the doors.
The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they
will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is
turned on from the LOCK position.
15
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Lock the doors by pushing down on the lock knob on
each door trim panel.
NOTE:
• None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer
control is in the “defeat” position (extreme downward
position).
If the lock knob is down when you shut the door, the
door will lock. Therefore, make sure the keys are not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
16
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
If you press the power door lock switch while the key is
in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing the key
or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A
chime will sound if the key is in the LOCK or ACC
position and a door is open, as a reminder to remove the
key.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
17
Automatic Door Locks
The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power
door locks if all of the following conditions are met:
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Automatic
Door Locks can be enabled or disabled by performing the
following procedure:
1. The Auto Lock feature is enabled.
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. The transmission is in gear.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position.
3. All doors are closed.
4. The throttle is pressed.
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h).
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power
door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter.
The Automatic Door Lock feature can be enabled or
disabled. Refer to “Personal Settings” (Customer Programmable Features) in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped section of this manual
for details.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
18
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Depress the power door lock switch to lock the doors.
Auto Unlock
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Auto Unlock feature is enabled.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
4. The driver door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
The Auto Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled.
Refer to “Personal Settings” (Customer Programmable
Features) in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — if equipped section of this manual.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Auto
Unlock Feature can be enabled or disabled by performing
the following procedure:
19
3. Depress the power door unlock switch to unlock the
doors.
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position.
NOTE: Use the Auto Door Locks and Auto Unlock
features in accordance with local laws.
Child Protection Door Lock
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a child
protection door lock system.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
20
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To activate the system, open the rear door and move the
child lock control, located near the door’s rear latch, to
the ON position.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, open
the trunk, or activate the panic alarm from distances up
to about 23 feet (7 meters) using a hand held radio
transmitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: If the key is in the ignition switch, then all
buttons on that transmitter will be disabled. The buttons
on the remaining transmitters will work. If the vehicle is
shifted out of PARK, all the transmitter buttons are
disabled for all keys.
When the child lock system is engaged the door can be
opened only by using the outside door handle even
though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To unlock the doors:
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter
once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice to unlock all
doors. The turn signal lights will flash twice to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system also
turns on.
The headlights will also activate and remain on for 90
seconds (programmable) when the doors are unlocked
using the remote keyless entry transmitter. The time for
this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer
to “Turn Headlamps on with Remote Key Unlock” under
“Personal Settings” in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) section of this manual for details.
NOTE: The system can also be programmed to unlock
all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button. Refer
to “Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st” under “Personal
Settings” in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) section of this manual, or simply follow these
steps:
21
2. While the UNLOCK button is pressed, (after 4 seconds) press the LOCK button. Release both buttons.
The “Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st” feature can be
reactivated by repeating this procedure.
To lock the doors:
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to
lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash once to
acknowledge the lock signal. The horn will chirp once to
acknowledge the signal. If desired, the “Sound Horn On
Lock” feature can be turned on and off by referring to
Personal Settings in the “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” section of this manual, or by following
these steps:
1. Press the LOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds.
2. While the LOCK button is pressed (after 4 seconds),
press the PANIC button. Release both buttons.
The “Sound Horn On Lock” feature can be reactivated by
repeating this procedure.
1. Press the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
22
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To unlock the trunk:
Press the trunk button on the transmitter two times to
unlatch the trunk.
The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you
turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or
if the vehicle speed is 15 mph (24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE: The transmitter can be programmed to unlatch
the trunk by pressing the trunk button only one time by
performing the following procedure:
NOTE: The interior lights will turn off when the
ignition is switched to the ACC or ON position after the
panic alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
horn will remain on.
1. Press and hold the Unlock button on the transmitter.
2. Continue to hold the Unlock button, wait at least 4
but no longer than 10 seconds, then press the trunk
button.
NOTE: When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing
the PANIC button a second time, you may have to be
closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of
the system.
To Turn Off “Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock”
3. Release both buttons.
Using The Panic Alarm:
To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the panic alarm is on, the
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off and the interior lights will turn on.
NOTE: The “Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock” feature can
be turned on and off by referring to “Personal Settings”
in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) section of this manual, or by following these steps:
1. Press the LOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds.
2. While the LOCK button is pressed, (after 4 seconds)
press the UNLOCK button. Release both buttons.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The “Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock” feature can be
reactivated by repeating this procedure.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
23
Transmitter Battery Service
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE: Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
1. With the transmitter buttons facing down, remove the
small screw, and separate the two halves of the transmitter. Make sure not to damage the rubber gasket during
removal.
If your Remote Keyless Entry transmitter fails to operate
from a normal distance, check for these two conditions.
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
24
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
3. To reassemble the transmitter case, join the two halves
of the case together. Install and tighten the screw until
snug. Make sure there is an even “gap” between the two
halves. Test transmitter operation.
VEHICLE THEFT ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
This system monitors the vehicle doors and ignition
switch for unauthorized entry or operation. When the
alarm is activated, the system provides both audible and
visual signals. The horn will pulse, headlights/park
lights will flash, the Vehicle Theft Alarm/Immobilizer
light, located on the instrument panel below the Electronic Vehicle Information Center buttons will flash, and
the vehicle will not start. If the alarm is triggered and no
action is taken to disarm it, the system will turn off the
horn after three minutes and after 15 minutes of light
only operation the system will then rearm itself.
To arm the system: Remove the key from the ignition
switch and either:
1. Press a power door lock switch while the driver’s or
passenger’s door is open.
2. Press the LOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter.
After the last door is closed, or if all doors are closed, the
system will arm itself in about 16 seconds. During that
time, the Vehicle Theft Alarm/Immobilizer light will
flash. If it does not illuminate, the system is not arming.
If you open a door during this arming period, the system
will cancel the arming process. You must repeat one of
the previously described arming sequences to rearm the
system.
To disarm the system: Press the UNLOCK button on the
keyless entry transmitter. Also, using a valid sentry key
and moving the ignition switch to the ON/START position will disarm the system. If something has triggered
the system in your absence, the horn will sound three
times when you disarm the system. Check the vehicle for
tampering.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the keyless entry transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
system.
• The system remains armed during trunk entry. Pressing the trunk button will not disarm the system. If
someone enters the vehicle through the trunk and
opens any door the alarm will sound.
25
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound, and the
ignition will not start the vehicle. If this occurs, disarm
the system.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
door windows.
• When the system is armed, the doors can not be
unlocked from the interior power door lock switches.
The Vehicle Theft Alarm system is designed to protect
your vehicle, however, you can create conditions where
the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the
previously described arming sequences has occurred, the
system will arm regardless of whether you are in the
vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
system.
The alarm system will be activated when the battery is
connected if the system was previously armed. The
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel which operate the passenger door windows.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
26
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
switch is in the ON or ACCESSORY position.
The window lock switch on the driver’s door allows you
to disable the window controls on the passenger doors.
When the lock switch is pressed the window controls on
the passenger doors will not illuminate and the passenger windows will be disabled.
Auto Down Feature
The driver door power window switch, and some model
passenger door power window switches have an auto
down feature. Press the window switch to the second
detent, release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the auto-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
The power window switches remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned off. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time is
customer programmable through the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped. Refer to
“Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit” under “Personal Settings” in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center section of this manual for details.
Auto Up Feature with Anti–Pinch Protection—If
Equipped
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
The power window switches remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned off. The
time is customer programmable through the electronic
vehicle information center (EVIC)—if equipped. Refer to
“Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit” in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center section for details.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure it will reverse direction and then stop.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to
close the window.
NOTE: Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during
auto closure. If this happens pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Reset
Any time the vehicle battery is disconnected or goes dead
the auto-up function will be disabled. To reactivate the
auto-up feature perform the following steps after vehicle
power is restored:
27
• Pull the window switch up to close window completely, then hold the switch for a second.
• Push the window switch firmly down to second detent
to open the window automatically until the window is
fully open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
28
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
With the ignition ON, the trunk open symbol will be
displayed in the instrument cluster indicating that the
trunk is open. The odometer display will reappear once
the trunk is closed.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
With the key in lock position or key out, the trunk open
symbol will be displayed until the trunk is closed.
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Use the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to open the
trunk from outside the vehicle. The trunk lid can be
released from inside the vehicle by pressing the Trunk
Release Button located on the instrument panel to the left
of the steering wheel. The transmission must be in Park
before the switch will operate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Trunk Emergency Release
29
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front
airbags for both the driver and front passenger and, if so
equipped, left and right side curtain airbags for the
driver and passengers seated next to a window. If you
will be carrying children too small for adult-size belts,
your seat belts also can be used to hold infant and child
restraint systems.
The trunk of your vehicle is equipped with an emergency
release handle. It is located on the inside of the trunk lid,
near the latch, and is coated so that it glows in a darkened
trunk. Pull on the handle to open the trunk.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
30
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
Lap/Shoulder Belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle
or being thrown out.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision which includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
31
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
WARNING!
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the
best. Wearing your belt in the wrong place could
make your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep
your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for
more than one person, no matter what their size.
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch
plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt
go around your lap.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
32
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too
high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In
a sudden stop you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle
in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt
worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs
aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over
your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the
force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more likely
to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be
used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
collision.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it
to your dealer and have it fixed.
33
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
2
34
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the shoulder belt
can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt
away from your neck. Push and fully depress the button
above the webbing to release the anchorage, and then
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to
position the belt away from your neck.
Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove any slack from the seat belts in the event of a
collision. These devices improve the performance of the
seat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight about the
occupant in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
The pretensioners are triggered by the airbag control
module (see Airbag Section). Like the front airbags, the
pretensioners are single use items. After a collision that is
severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners,
both must be replaced.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within 60
seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning
System (BeltAlert) will alert the driver to buckle their seat
belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to
buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will continue to
chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96
seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. The
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will be reactivated
if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10
seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8
km/h).
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by
following these steps:
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
35
or START position. DaimlerChrysler does not recommend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert).
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
buckle the driver’s seat belt.
2. Start the engine and wait for the Seat Belt Warning
Light to turn off.
3. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle
and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt at least three
times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt
buckled.
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on
while unbuckling and off while re-buckling the seat belt.
It may be necessary to retract the seat belt.
4. Turn off the engine. A single chime will sound to
signify that you have successfully completed the programming.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
36
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Although the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning
Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s seat
belt remains unbuckled.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if so
equipped) is in its lowest position, your dealer can
provide you with a seat belt extender. This extender
should be used only if the existing belt is not long
enough. When it is not required, remove the extender
and store it.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is
worn low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Driver and Right Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag
This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s airbag is mounted in the center of
the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag is
mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the
airbag covers.
37
This vehicle may also be equipped with left and right
side curtain airbags to protect the driver and passengers
sitting next to a window. If the vehicle is equipped with
side curtain airbags, they are located above the side
windows. Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
38
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not put anything on or around the front airbag
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are not there to protect you. These
protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right side
curtain airbags, do not stack luggage or other cargo
up high enough to block the location of the side
curtain airbag. The area where the side curtain airbag
is located should remain free from any obstructions.
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right side
curtain airbags, do not have any accessory items
installed which will alter the roof, including adding
a sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts. Along
with the seat belts, front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection
for the driver and front passenger. Left and right side
curtain airbags also work with seat belts to improve
occupant protection.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy only in moderate
to severe frontal collisions. If your vehicle is so equipped,
the side curtain airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is
triggered in moderate to severe side collisions. In certain
types of collisions where the airbags deploy, you need the
seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags
to protect you properly.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizens band radios etc.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years old and under should ride buckled
up in the rear seat. Infants in rear-facing child restraints
should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a
passenger front airbag. An airbag deployment could
cause severe injury or death to infants in that position.
Children that are not big enough to properly wear the
vehicle seat belt (see section on “Child Restraint”) should
be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats.
Older children who do not use child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the
shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
39
If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child
restraint. See the section on “Child Restraint”.
2. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
3. All occupants should use their seat belts properly.
4. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the airbags time to inflate.
5. If your vehicle has left and right side curtain airbags,
do not lean against the door, airbags will inflate forcefully
into the space between you and the door.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
40
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbag System Components
The front airbag system consists of the following:
WARNING!
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you
have airbags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause
serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit
back, comfortably extending your arms to reach
the steering wheel or instrument panel.
• If the vehicle has left and right side curtain
airbags, they also need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Airbag Control Module
• AIRBAG Readiness Light
• PASS AIRBAG OFF Readiness Light
• Front Impact Accelerometer sensors
• Side Impact Accelerometer sensors
• Driver Airbag
• Passenger Airbag
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Interconnecting Wiring
• Knee Impact Bolsters
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The side curtain airbag system, on vehicles so equipped,
consists of the following:
• Airbag Control Module
• AIRBAG Readiness Light
• Left and Right Side Curtain Airbags Above Side
Windows
• Left and Right Side Impact Sensors
• Interconnection Wiring
How The Airbag System Works
• The airbag control module determines if a frontal
collision is severe enough to require the airbags to
inflate. The control module receives the level of collision severity, determines the proper level of airbag to
be deployed. The frontal airbag inflators are designed
to provide three different rates of airbag inflation.
• The airbag control module will not detect a rollover.
• The airbag control module also monitors the readiness
of the electronic parts of the system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON positions. These
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
41
include all of the items listed above except the knee
bolster, the instrument panel, and the steering wheel
and column. If the key is in the “LOCK” position, in
the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the airbags are
not on and will not inflate.
• The airbag control module also turns on the
AIRBAG light, and the Passenger Airbag
Disable (PAD) Indicator Light in the instrument panel for 6 to 8 seconds when the
ignition is first turned on, then turns the light off. If it
detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns
on the light either momentarily or continuously.
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIRBAG light in your instrument panel
could mean you won’t have the airbags to protect
you in a collision. If the light does not come on, stays
on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you
drive, have the airbag system checked right away.
2
42
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• When the airbag control module detects a collision
requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator units. A
large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate
the airbags. Three levels of airbag inflation rates are
possible. These rates are determined by the airbag
control module based on collision severity. The airbag
covers separate and fold out of the way as the airbags
inflate to their full size. The airbags fully inflate in
about 60 milliseconds. This is only about half of the
time it takes you to blink your eyes. The airbags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger. The driver’s front airbag gas is vented
through a vent hole in the rear of the airbag. The
passenger’s front airbag gas is vented through vent
holes in the sides of the airbag. In this way the airbags
do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
• The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees and
position you for the best interaction with the front
airbag.
If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag system is designed to deploy when the airbag
control module detects a moderate-to-severe collision, to
help restrain the driver and front passenger, and then to
immediately deflate.
NOTE: A collision that is not severe enough to need
airbag protection will not activate the system. This does
not mean something is wrong with the airbag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and right
front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
43
• As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Enhanced Accident Response Feature
If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical
system remains functional, vehicles equipped with
power door locks will unlock automatically. In addition,
approximately 5 seconds after the vehicle has stopped
moving, the interior lights will illuminate to aid visibility.
• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have been deployed. If you are involved in
another collision, the airbags will not be in place to
protect you.
Side Airbag System
The airbag control module determines if a side collision is
severe enough to require the airbag to inflate. The control
module receives the level of collision severity from the
side impact sensors. The airbag control module will not
detect rollover or rear impacts.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags can’t protect you in another collision. Have the airbags replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE: The interior lights can only be deactivated if the
key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is
driven.
The side impact SRS Airbags are designed to activate
only in certain side collisions. When the airbag control
module detects a collision requiring the side curtain
airbags to inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side
of the vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the side curtain airbags. The inflating side curtain
airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
44
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
way and inflates (in about the same time it takes to blink
your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you are not
belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in
the area where the side curtain airbag inflates. This
especially applies to children. The side curtain airbag is
only about 3 1⁄2 inches (8 3⁄4 cm) thick when it is inflated.
Maintaining Your Airbag System
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured because the airbags are not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or
the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or frame.
• You need proper knee impact protection in a
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee impact bolster.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has airbags.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
45
Occupant Classification System
• The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of
a Federally regulated safety system required for this
vehicle. It is designed to turn off the front passenger
airbag in the unlikely event that a rear-facing infant
seat is in the front passenger seat.
2
NOTE: Children 12 years and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint.
• The Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
(an amber light located in the center of the instrument
panel) tells the driver and front passenger when the
front passenger airbag is turned off. The PAD Indicator lamp illuminates the words 9PASS AIRBAG OFF9
to show that the passenger airbag will not inflate
during a collision requiring airbags.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
This light should not be illuminated when an adult
passenger is properly seated in the front passenger
seat. In this case, the airbag is ready to be inflated if a
collision requiring an airbag occurs. The PAD Indicator Light is also turned off when the seat is empty. The
only time that the PAD Indicator Light is turned on is
when a small weight is in the front passenger seat. The
system is required to turn on the PAD Indicator Light
when the weight in the front passenger seat is close to
a rear-facing infant seat. Relatively light objects like
brief cases and grocery bags will also turn on the PAD
46
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Indicator Light. The PAD Indicator Light will be off
when teenagers, most children and most children in
forward-facing seats are in the front passenger seat.
The system is only required to turn the PAD Indicator
Light on in the unlikely event that a rear-facing infant
seat is installed in front passenger seat.
NOTE: Children 12 years and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint.
Front Passenger
Seat Occupant
Passenger
Airbag Disable
(PAD) Indicator
Light
OFF
Airbag Status
Airbag Status
ON
Grocery Bags,
Heavy Briefcases
ON
OFF
and Other
Relatively Light
Objects
Empty or Very
OFF*
OFF
Small Objects
* Since the system senses weight, some small objects
will turn the PAD Indicator Light on.
The OCS classifies an occupant using weight sensors
mounted in the base of the front passenger seat. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the system. Objects
hanging on the seat or other passengers pushing down
on the seat will also be sensed. The weight of an adult
will cause the system to turn the airbag on. In this case,
the OCS has classified the occupant of the seat as an
adult. An adult occupant needs to sit in a normal position
(with their feet on or near the floor) in order to be
properly classified.
Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the PAD
Indicator Light is not illuminated when they are riding in
the front passenger seat. If an adult occupant’s weight is
transferred to another part of the vehicle (like the door or
instrument panel), the weight sensors in the seat may not
properly classify the occupant. Objects lodged under the
seat or between the seat and the center console can
prevent the occupant’s weight from being measured
properly and may result in the occupant being improperly classified.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way, it
should only be serviced by an authorized dealer. If the
seat is removed (or even if the seat attachment bolts are
loosened or tightened in any way), take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer.
If the is a fault present in the OCS, the Airbag Warning
Light (a red light located in the center of the instrument
cluster directly in front of the driver) will be turned on.
This indicates that you should take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. The Airbag Warning Light is turned on
whenever there is fault that can affect the operation of the
airbag system. If there is a fault present in the OCS, both
the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light
are illuminated to show that the passenger airbag is
turned off until the fault is cleared. If an object is lodged
under the seat and interferes with operation of the weight
sensors, a fault will occur which turns on both the PAD
Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light. Once the
lodged object is removed, the fault will be automatically
cleared after a short period of time.
47
• The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator
units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the front airbags. Different airbag inflation rates
may be possible based on collision severity and occupant size. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper right side of the instrument panel separate and
fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size.
The bags fully inflate in about 50 - 70 milliseconds.
This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes.
The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger. The driver’s front
airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of
the airbag. The passenger’s front airbag gas is vented
through vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this
way the airbags do not interfere with your control of
the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
48
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located beneath the front passenger seat. The OCM
classifies the occupant into categories based on the
measurements made by the seat weight sensors. The
OCM communicates with the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). The ORC uses the occupant category to
determine whether the front passenger airbag should
be turned off. It also determines the rate of airbag
inflation during a collision.
• The Passenger Airbag Disabled (PAD) Indicator
Light indicates to the driver and passenger when the
airbag is turned OFF. In the presence of a properly
seated occupant, when the PAD indicator light is
illuminated, the airbag is OFF. Also, when the Occupant Classification System detects either an empty seat
or a weight less than the predetermined threshold, the
ORC will not illuminate the PAD indicator light even
though the airbag is turned OFF.
• Your vehicle has four Weight Sensors located between
the seat and the floor pan. The weight sensors measure
applied weight and transfers that information to the
OCM.
Airbag Light
You will want to have the airbags ready for your protection in an impact. While the airbag system is designed to
be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system promptly:
• The AIRBAG light does not come on or flickers during
the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first
turned on.
• The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second
interval.
• The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
driving.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an airbag deployment, your vehicle is
designed to record up to 2-seconds of specific vehicle
data parameters (see list below) in an event data recorder
prior to the moment of airbag deployment. Please note
that such data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys,
and are otherwise unavailable. In conjunction with other
data gathered during a complete accident investigation,
the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler and
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes
and associated injuries in order to assess and improve
vehicle performance. In addition to crash investigations
initiated by DaimlerChrysler, such investigations may be
requested by customers, insurance carriers, government
officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those
associated with universities, and with hospital and insurance organizations.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
DaimlerChrysler (regardless of initiative), the company
or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle
(usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the
electronic data stored, unless ordered to download data
by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a
warrant). A copy of the data will be provided to the
custodial entity upon request. General data that does not
identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for
incorporation in aggregate crash databases, such as those
maintained by the US government and various states.
Data of a potentially sensitive nature, such as would
identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be
49
treated confidentially. Confidential data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler to any third party except
when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved
2. Used in defense of
DaimlerChrysler product
litigation
involving
a
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
4. Otherwise required by law
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp status
for electronically-controlled safety systems, including
the airbag system
• Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped)
• 9Time9 of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
• Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
50
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Seatbelt status
WARNING!
• Brake status (service and parking brakes)
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny
baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your lap
could become so great that you could not hold the
child, no matter how strong you are. The child and
others could be badly injured. Any child riding in
your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the
child’s size.
• Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
• Engine control status (including engine speed)
• Cruise control status
• Traction/stability control status
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, babies and children, too. Every state in the United
States and all Canadian provinces require that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the right seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child:
Infants and Child Restraints
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
one year old and weigh at least 9 kg (20 lbs). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and “convertible” child seats.
51
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a
deploying passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant.
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). “Convertible” child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
LATCH child restraint anchorage system. (See the
LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System section.)
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger
airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in this position.
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it before you buy it.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
52
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
NOTE:
For additional information refer
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK.
to
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. (See the LATCH — Child
Seat Anchorage System Section.)
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the
child’s back is against the seat back, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and beltpositioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seat back, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
53
LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CH ildren)
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
structure.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now available. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
also have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time. For some older child restraints, many
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all
the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
54
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages
that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible
child seats. You should NEVER install LATCHcompatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage. If installing child seats in adjacent
rear-seating positions or if your child restraints are not
LATCH-compatible, install the restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts.
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system.
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at
the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seat back,
and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and
seat cushion surfaces.
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located in the
panel between the rear seat back and the rear
window. These tether strap anchorages are
under a plastic cover with this symbol on it.
Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forwardfacing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the
hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next
attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the
seat cover material. Then rotate the tether anchorage
cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the
child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage, being careful to route the tether strap to provide the
most direct path between the anchor and the child
restraint. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear
head restraints, raise the head restraint and, where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and route the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps
as you push the child restraint rearward and downward
into the seat, removing slack in the straps according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
55
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
belt
The passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching latch
plates which are designed to keep the lap portion tight
around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use
a locking clip. Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the
lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch
plate will keep the belt tight, however, any seat belt
system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
56
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times
to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out.
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if by pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need
to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from
the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch
plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make the
child restraint secure, try a different seating position.
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
1. Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the
seat where you are placing the child restraint.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint and, where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint to
the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
57
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your new vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55
mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
shown in Section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT
OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE
USED.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
58
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered as a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
WARNING!
If you are required to drive with the trunk open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
SAFETY TIPS
Exhaust Gas
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow the safety tips below.
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn
webbing, etc. If there is any question regarding belt or
retractor condition, replace the belt.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
Airbag Light
The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
turned ON. If the LED is not lit during starting, have it
checked. If the light stays on or comes on while driving,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
59
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or fuel, power steering fluid or brake
fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and
corrected immediately.
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or
cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness, and tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
m Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Heated Remote Control Mirrors —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Driver’s Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . .68
m Hands–Free Communication (UConnect™) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
▫ Tilt In Reverse Feature— If Equipped . . . . . . . .66
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
▫ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
▫ UConnect™ System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
▫ Outside Mirror — Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . .66
▫ Outside Mirror — Passenger’s Side . . . . . . . . . .66
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
UConnect™ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
▫ Power Remote-Control Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
m Rear Park Assist System— If Equipped . . . . . . .88
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
62
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
m Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
▫ Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
▫ Power Reclining Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
▫ Multi-Function Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
▫ Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
▫ Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
▫ Heated Seats—If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
▫ Memory Feature—If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
▫ Programming The Remote Keyless Transmitter
For The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
▫ Driver’s Seat Glide –To – Exit Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
▫ Automatic Headlights–If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 104
▫ Headlamps On With Wipers
(Available With Auto Headlights Only) . . . . . . 104
▫ Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only) . . . . . 104
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
m Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
m To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
▫ Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . 106
m Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
▫ Flash To Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
▫ Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights . . . . . 101
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
63
m Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 106
m Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers—If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 107
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ Headlamps On With Wipers
(Available With Auto Headlights Only) . . . . . . 107
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
m Overhead Console — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 118
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
m Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 109
m Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
m Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 119
m Traction Control System (Tcs) — If Equipped . . 110
m Brake Assist System (BAS)— If Equipped . . . . 112
m Electronic Stability Program (ESP)—
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
▫ Synchronizing ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
▫ Programming Homelink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ Canadian Programming/Gate Programming . . 122
▫ Using Homelink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Erasing Homelink Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Reprogramming a Single Homelink Button . . . 123
3
64
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
m Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
m Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
▫ Express Open Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
▫ Rear Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
m Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
m Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
▫ Cargo Tie-Down Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
▫ Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off . . . . . . . 128
m Load Leveling System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 132
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear
window. A two point pivot system allows for horizontal
and vertical adjustment of the mirror.
65
Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror — If Equipped
If the switch is in the “AUTO” position the mirror will
automatically adjust for annoying headlight glare from
vehicles behind you. The mirror will normally be in the
“AUTO” mode unless “OFF” is pressed on the switch at
the base of the mirror. A green light in the base of the
mirror will illuminate to indicate when this feature is on.
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
66
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the
mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and
wipe the mirror clean.
Driver’s Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer — If
Equipped
The driver’s side outside mirror automatically adjusts for
annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you. This
feature can be turned on or off by pressing the button at
the base of the Inside Rearview Mirror.
Tilt in Reverse Feature— If Equipped
The 9Tilt in Reverse9 feature tilts the outside rearview
mirrors down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE
with the ignition switch in the RUN position. This feature
provides the customer with a better view of the ground
and vehicle in the area of the rear tires when backing up.
The mirrors move back to their previous position when
the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This feature is
disabled from the factory, but can be enabled by the
electronic vehicle information center (EVIC). Refer to
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in this
manual for details.
Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged and
may move either forward or rearward to resist damage.
The hinges have three detent positions; full forward, full
rearward, and normal.
Outside Mirror — Driver’s Side
Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of
traffic, with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
Outside Mirror — Passenger’s Side
Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the
side of your vehicle in the portion of the mirror closest to
the vehicle. This type of mirror will give a much wider
view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to your
vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
67
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your right
side mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object.
Use your inside mirror when judging the size or
distance of a vehicle seen in this convex mirror.
3
Power Remote-Control Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel next to the power door lock switch. A rotary
knob selects the left mirror, right mirror, or off position.
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Seats”
section for details.
After selecting a mirror move the knob in the same
direction you want the mirror to move. Use the center off
position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror
position.
Heated Remote Control Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature
is activated whenever you turn on the Rear Window
Defrost.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
68
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) —
IF EQUIPPED
UConnect™ is a voice-activated, hands-free, in vehicle
communications system. UConnect™ allows you to dial
a phone number with your cellular phone* using simple
voice commands (e.g., 9Call { Mike {Work9 or 9Dial {
248-555-12129). Your cellular phone’s audio is transmitted
through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will
automatically mute your radio when using the UConnect™ system.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth 9Hands-Free Profile,9
version 0.96 or higher.
For UConnect Customer Support call 1-877-855-8400
or visit the UConnect website (www.chrysler.com/
uconnect).
UConnect™ allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s microphone for private conversation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The UConnect™ phonebook enables you to store up to 32
names and four numbers per name. This system is driven
through your Bluetooth™ Hands-Free profile cellular
phone. UConnect™ features Bluetooth™ technology - the
global standard that enables different electronic devices
to connect to each other without wires or a docking
station, so UConnect works no matter where you stow
your cellular phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on and has been
paired to the vehicle’s UConnect™ system. The UConnect™ system allows up to seven cellular phones to be
linked to system. Only one linked (or paired) cellular
phone can be used with the system at a time. The system
is available in English, Spanish, or French languages (as
equipped).
The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the
system and the control buttons that will enable you to
access the system. The diagram below shows the mirror
with the appropriate buttons. Individual button behavior
is discussed in the 9Operation9 section.
69
NOTE: For the best performance of the hands-free
system’s audio and voice recognition adjust the rear view
mirror to provide at least a 1/2 inch gap (1 cm) between
the overhead console and the mirror.
3
Uconnect Buttons
The UConnect™ system can be used with any HandsFree Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. If your
cellular phone supports a different profile (eg., Headset
Profile), you may not be able to use any UConnect™
features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the
phone manufacturer for details.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
70
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The UConnect™ system is fully integrated with the
vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect™
system can either be adjusted from the radio volume
control knob, or from the steering wheel radio control
(right switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the UConnect™ system such as 9CELL9 or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect™
system and to navigate through the UConnect™ menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnect™ system prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the voice on beep, which follows the 9Ready9 prompt
or another prompt.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying 9Setup9 and then
9Phone Pairing,9 the following compound command
can be said: 9Setup Phone Pairing.9
• For each of the feature explanation in this section, only
the combined form of the voice command is given.
You can also break the commands into parts and say
each part of the command, when you are asked for it.
For example, you can either use the combined form
voice command 9Phonebook New Entry,9 or you can
break the combined form command into two voice
commands: 9Phonebook9 and 9New Entry.9 Please remember, the UConnect™ system works best when you
talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to
some one sitting eight feet away from you.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to
know what your options are at any prompt, say 9Help9
following the voice on beep. The UConnect™ system will
play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To activate the UConnect™ system from idle, simply
press the ’Phone’ button and follow audible prompts for
directions. All UConnect™ system sessions begin with a
press of the ’Phone’ button on the mirror.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the voice on beep, you can say
9Cancel9 and you will be returned to the main menu.
However, in a few instances the system will take you
back to the previous menu.
Pair (Link) UConnect™ System to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your UConnect™ system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone (refer to 9Introduction9 section to learn about the phone
type). To complete the pairing process, you will need to
reference your cellular phone owner’s manual. One of the
following vehicle specific websites may also provide
detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone
that you have:
NOTE: www.chrysler.com/uconnect
The following are general phone to UConnect™ System
pairing instructions:
71
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Setup Phone Pairing.9
• When prompted, after the voice on beep, say 9Pair a
Phone.9
• You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number which
you will later need to enter into your cellular. You can
enter any four-digit pin number. You will not need to
remember this pin number after the initial pairing
process.
• The UConnect™ system will then prompt you to begin
the cellular phone pairing process on your cellular
phone. Before attempting to pair phone, please see
your cellular phone’s user manual (Bluetooth section)
for instructions on how to complete this step.
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect™ system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
72
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
your UConnect™ system. However, at any given time,
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
your UConnect™ System. The priority allows the
UConnect™ system to know which cellular phone to
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect™
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
cellular phone at any time (refer to 9Advanced Phone
Connectivity9 section).
Dial by Saying a Number
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Dial.9
• System will prompt you to say the number you want
call.
• For example, you can say 9234-567-8901.9 The phone
number that you enter must be of valid length and
combination. The UConnect™ limits the user from
dialing invalid combination of numbers. For example,
234-567-890 is nine digits long, which is not a valid
phone number - the closest valid phone number has
ten digits.
• The UConnect™ system will confirm the phone number and then dial. The number will appear in the
display of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Call.9
• System will prompt you to say the name of the person
you want call.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
you can say 9John Doe,9 where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the UConnect™ phonebook. Refer to section 9Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook,9 to learn how to store a name in the
phonebook.
• The UConnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to phonebook is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook New Entry.9
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and is recommended. For example, say 9Robert Smith9 or 9Robert9
instead of 9Bob.9
73
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.:
9Home,9 9Work,9 9Mobile,9 or 9Pager9). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The UConnect™ system will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations.
Edit Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to phonebook is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook Edit.9
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
74
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry
in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or
return to the main menu.
9Phonebook Edit9 can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s
work number later using the 9Phonebook Edit9 feature.
Delete Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook Delete.9
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say 9List
Names9 to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the 9Voice Recognition9 button
while the UConnect™ system is playing the desired
entry and say 9Delete.9
• After you enter the name, the UConnect™ system will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile or pager. Say the designation you wish
to delete.
Delete All Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook Erase All.9
• The UConnect™ system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
List All Names in the UConnect™ Phonebook
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook List Names.9
• The UConnect™ system will play the names of all the
phonebook entries.
• To call one of the names in the list, press the 9Voice
Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired
name and say 9Call9. NOTE: the user can also exercise
9Edit9 or 9Delete9 operations at this point.
• The UConnect™ system will then prompt you as to
number designation you wish to call.
• The selected number will be dialed.
75
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
UConnect™ system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnect™ system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnect™ system will interrupt the vehicle audio
system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. To reject the call, press and hold the ’Phone’ button
until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming
call was rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
phone. Press the ’Phone’ button to place the current call
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
76
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
on hold and answer the incoming call. NOTE: The
UConnect™ system compatible phones in market today
do not support rejecting an incoming call when another
call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only either
answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call while Current Call in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently in a call,
press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say 9Dial9 or
9Call9 followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer
to section 9Toggling Between Two Calls.9 To combine two
calls, refer to section 9Conference Call.9
Place / Retrieve a Call from Hold
To put a call on hold, press the ’Phone’ button until you
hear a single beep which will indicate that the call has
been placed on hold. To bring the call back from hold,
press and hold the ’Phone’ button for 1 to 3 seconds.
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the ’Voice Recognition’ button while a call is in progress and make a second
phone call as described in section 9Making a Second Call
while Current Call in Progress.9 After the second call has
established, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you
hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have
been joined into one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the ’Phone’
button. All active calls will be terminated.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the ’Phone’ button until you hear a single beep
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Redial
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Redial.9
• The UConnect™ system will call the last number that
was dialed on your cellular phone. Note: this may not
be the last number dialed from the UConnect™ system.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is progression of a phone call on
UConnect™ system after the vehicle ignition key has
been switched to LOCK. Call continuation functionality
can be of three types:
• After ignition key is switched to LOCK, a call can
continue on the UConnect™ system either until the
call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the UConnect™ system and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
77
• After ignition key is switched to LOCK, a call can
continue on the UConnect™ system for certain duration, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the UConnect™ system to the mobile phone.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after ignition key is switched to LOCK
Vehicles, such as Pacifica, support this approach.
UConnect™ System Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnect™ system is
using,
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
(English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
78
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: After every UConnect™ language change operation, you need to re-enter names to the phonebook
and re-pair (re-link) phone(s).
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect™ system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Emergency9 and the UConnect™ system will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency number. This feature is only supported in the USA.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system does slightly lower
your chances of successfully making a phone call as to
that for the cell phone directly.
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
UConnect™ system to allow use of this vehicle feature
in emergency situations when the cell phone has
network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect™
system.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance,
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Towing Assistance.9
Please refer to the 24-Hour Towing Assistance coverage
details in the DaimlerChrysler Corporation 24-Hour
Towing Assistance Program Guide.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to section 9Working with
Automated Systems.9 Paging works properly except for
pagers of certain companies which timeout a little too
soon to work properly with the UConnect™ system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to section
9Working with Automated Systems.9
Working with Automated Systems
This method is designed to be used in instances where
one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone
keypad while navigating through an automated telephony system.
You can use your UConnect™ system to access a voicemail system or an automated service, such as, paging
service or automated customer service. Some services
require immediate response selection, in some instances,
that may be too quick for use of UConnect™ system.
When calling a number with your UConnect™ system
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push
the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say the sequence you
wish to enter followed by the word 9Send.9 For example,
if required to enter your pin number followed with a
pound 3 7 4 6 #, you can press the ’Voice Recognition’
button and say 93 7 4 6 # Send.9 Saying a number, or
sequence of numbers, followed by 9Send9 is also to be
79
used to navigate through an automated customer service
center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The ’Voice Recognition’ button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is playing 9Would you like to pair a phone, clear
a{,9 you could press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and
say 9Pair a Phone9 to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g. the UConnect™ system will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Setup Confirmations.9 The UConnect™ system will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
Voice Confirmation Prompts are also customer programmable through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
80
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
— If Equipped. Refer to “Personal Settings” in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center section of this
manual for details.
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
The UConnect™ system will provide notification to
inform you if your cellular phone is in roaming status,
has low signal strength, or has a low battery when you
are trying to place a phone call.
Mute/Un-mute (Mute off)
When you mute the UConnect™ system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnect™ system:
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnect™ system (while
dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnect™ system will work the
same as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
• Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send
the dial ring to the UConnect™ system to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Mute.9
In order to un-mute the UConnect™ system:
• Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Mute-off.9
Information Service
When using AT&T Wireless Service, dialing to phone
number 9#121,9 you can access voice activated automated
system to receive news, weather, stocks, traffic, etc.
related information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Advanced Phone Connectivity
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The UConnect™ system allows on going calls to be
transferred to your cellular phone to the UConnect™
system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your UConnect™ paired cellular phone to
the UConnect™ system or vice-versa, press the ’Voice
Recognition’ button and say 9Transfer Call.9
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
UConnect™ System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively 9connected9
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth™ connection between a UConnect™ paired cellular
phone and the UConnect™ system, follow the instruction
described in your cellular phone user’s manual.
81
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Setup List Phones9.
• When prompted, say 9List Phones9.
• The UConnect™ system will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority.
Select another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone with the UConnect™ system. The phone must
have been previously paired to the UConnect™ system
that you want to use it with.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Setup Select Phone.9
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
82
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When prompted, say the phone name of the cellular
phone you wish to use, or say 9List Phones9 to hear a
list of all the phones that have been paired to your
UConnect™ system. To select a phone from the list,
press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say 9Select.9
Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™
System
• A lower priority phone will only be used for the next
phone call. After that, the UConnect™ system will
return to using the highest priority phone present in or
near (approximately with in 30 feet) the vehicle.
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet
away from you.
Voice Recognition (VR)
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
Delete UConnect™ Paired Cellular Phones
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• Performance is maximized under:
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Setup Phone Pairing.9
• At the next prompt, say 9Delete.9
• You will be asked to say the name of the phone that
you wish to delete. You can either say the name of the
phone that you wish to delete or you can say 9All9 to
delete all the phones.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather condition.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English and Spanish accents, the
system may not always work for some.
Far End Audio Performance:
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• When navigating through an automated system, such
as, voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say 9send.9
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in
motion is recommended.
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows, and
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the UConnect™ phonebook.
• UConnect™ phonebook name tag recognition rate is
optimized for the person who stored the name in the
phonebook.
• You can say 9O9 (letter 9O9) for 909 (zero). 98009 must be
spoken 9eight-zero-zero.9
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
83
• dry weather condition.
• Operation from driver seat.
• Performance, such as, audio clarity, echo. and loudness to a large degree, rely on the phone and network,
and not the UConnect™ system.
• Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering
the in-vehicle audio volume.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
84
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Bluetooth Communication Link
Cellular phones have been found to occasionally loose
connection to the UConnect™ system. When this happens, the connection can generally be re-established by
switching the phone off/on. Your cell phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth 9on9 mode.
Reset
In rare instances, it may be necessary to reset the UConnect™ system. The reset feature is exercised by pressing
and holding the ’UConnect™ ’ and ’Voice Recognition’
buttons simultaneously for 15 seconds. Normally, you do
not need to exercise this feature.
Power-Up
After switching ignition key from LOCK to either ON or
ACC position, or after a reset, you must wait at least five
(5) seconds prior to using the system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
85
3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
86
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
87
3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
88
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM— IF EQUIPPED
This system is used to help drivers determine if an
obstacle is in the way of the vehicle while it is backing up
in addition to the use of inside rearview and outside
mirrors.
When the driver selects Reverse or Neutral the system
scans for objects behind the vehicle using four sensors
located in the rear bumper. Objects can be detected from
up to 71 inches (180 cm). A warning display above the
rear window provides both visible and audible warnings
indicating the range of the object.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Park Assist System. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury
or death.
The display contains two sets of yellow and red LEDs
that can be viewed from the driver seat using the rear
view mirror. Each side of the vehicle has its own warning
LEDs. The system provides a visual warning by illuminating one or more yellow LEDs as the vehicle gets closer
to the object. As the vehicle continues to approaches the
object, one red LED is illuminated and the system emits
a series of short beeps. The tone will remain constant and
both red LEDs are illuminated once the vehicle is within
12 inches (30.5 cm) of the object.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Rear Park Assist System displays the outer
most yellow LED’s at a slightly dimmer level to indicate
that the system is ON.
NOTE: When an audio tone is indicated by the Rear
Park Assist display the system will MUTE the radio if it
is turned on.
The system can be turned on or off through the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) when the vehicle is in
PARK. Refer to “Personal Settings” in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center section of this manual for
details.
89
SEATS
Power Seats
The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat
near the floor. Use this switch to move the driver’s seat
up or down, forward or rearward, or to tilt the seat. The
passenger’s seat will move up or down, forward or
rearward.
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris
to keep the system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of the system.
If “Service Park Assist System” appears in the EVIC after
making sure the rear bumper is clean please see your
authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Power Seat Switch
3
90
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Reclining Seats
The recliner control is on the outboard side of the seat.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat as it may
cause damage to the seat controls.
Power Seat Recline Switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
91
Lumbar Support
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the
amount of lumbar support. Turn the control lever forward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired
amount of lumbar support.
Lumbar Support Control Lever
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
92
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Seats—If Equipped
Heated seats, which are available only with leather
upholstery, provide comfort and warmth on cold days
and can help soothe sore muscles and backs. The heaters
provide the same heat level for both cushion and back.
The front driver’s and passenger seats are heated. The
controls for each heater are located near the bottom
center of the instrument panel. After turning on the
ignition, you can choose from High, Off, or Low heat
settings. Amber LEDs in the top portion of each switch
indicate the level of heat in use. Two LEDs are illuminated for high, one for low, and none for off. Pressing the
switch once will select high-level heating.
Heated Seat Switch
Pressing the switch a second time will select low-level
heating. Pressing the switch a third time will shut the
heating elements off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When high-temperature heating is selected, the heaters
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation after heating is activated. The heat output
then drops to the normal high-temperature level. If
high-level heating is selected, the system will automatically switch to the low level after two hours of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated
LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change.
Operation on the low setting also turns off automatically
after two hours.
93
The memory feature switch is located on the driver’s
door panel. The memory switch allows the driver to
recall one of two pre-programmed memory profiles.
3
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
Memory Feature—If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to store up to two memory
profiles. Each memory profile will include the seat, side
mirror, adjustable pedal (if equipped), power tilt and
telescopic steering column (if equipped) settings as well
as radio station presets.
Memory Switch
To Set The Memory Feature:
1. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences. i.e. seat, side mirror, adjustable pedal (if
equipped), power tilt and telescopic steering column (if
equipped) settings as well as the radio presets.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
94
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Press and release the Set (S) button on the memory
seat switch, then press button 1 within 5 seconds. The
radio display will show which memory position is being
set.
3. A second memory profile can also be stored in the
vehicle memory. Begin by pressing 2 on the memory
switch for driver 2. Adjust settings to desired positions,
press Set (S) button, then press button 2 within 5 seconds.
Each time the Set and a numbered button are pressed, the
old memory is erased, and a new one is stored.
NOTE: Memory positions can be set without the vehicle in Park, but the vehicle must be in Park to recall a
memory position. The Recall Memory with Remote Key
Unlock feature must be turned on using the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to Electronic
Vehicle Information Center in this manual for details.
Programming the Remote Keyless Transmitter for
the Memory Feature
Your remote transmitter can be programmed to return to
a memory profile when the Unlock button is pressed and
released.
To program your transmitters, perform the following:
1. Insert the key into the ignition and turn the key to the
Run position.
2. Select desired memory profile 1 or 2.
3. Press and release the Set (S) button on the memory
seat switch, then press and release button 1 or 2.
9Memory Profile Set” (1or 2) will be displayed in the
instrument cluster on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center.
4. Press and release the Lock button on the transmitter
within 10 seconds.
NOTE: Your transmitters may be unlinked to your
memory settings by pressing the Unlock button on the
transmitter in step 4 above. On vehicles equipped with an
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (Optional), these
functions can be selected at the EVIC using the Personal
Settings (Customer Programmable Features). Refer to
Electronic Vehicle Information Center — “Personal Settings” for details. When newly purchased (or replacement) transmitters are programmed into the vehicle, the
first transmitter trained will be associated with memory
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
setting 1, and the second transmitter trained will be
associated with memory setting 2. Additional transmitters will not be associated with a memory setting.
Driver’s Seat Glide –To – Exit Feature — If
Equipped
This feature provides ease of entry and exit for the driver
by moving the driver’s seat approximately 2–1/8 inches
(55mm) rearward on exit and the same distance forward
after entry, provided that the seat is not in the full
rearward position.
After entry, the seat will return to its previously set
position after one of the following occurs:
• The ignition switch is turned on
• The seatbelt is fastened (the seat moves when the seat
belt buckle is buckled.)
The seat moves when the seat belt buckle is buckled.
95
This feature can be turned off by performing the following procedure:
1. Press and hold the Set (S) button on the memory seat
switch (located on the driver’s door panel).
2. Move the horizontal seat switch rearward.
3. Release the Set (S) button and the horizontal seat
switch.
During exit, the seat will move rearward from the set
position when the key is removed from the ignition
providing that the seat is not in the full rearward
position.
This feature can be turned on or off by performing the
following procedure.
1. Press and hold the Set (S) button.
2. Move the horizontal seat switch rearward.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
96
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Release the Set (S) button and the horizontal seat
switch.
NOTE: The glide feature is only available on the
driver’s seat.
The head restraints have a locking button which must be
pushed in to lower the head restraint. The restraints may
be raised without pushing in the button.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with an EVIC (Electronic
Vehicle Information Center — Optional), these functions
can be selected at the EVIC using the Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features). Refer to Electronic
Vehicle Information Center — Personal Settings for details.
Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Adjustable restraints
should be adjusted so that the upper edge is as high as
practical.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
97
When the seat back is folded to the upright position make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seat
back above the seat strap.
Folding Rear Seat
WARNING!
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in an accident. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. Pull on the loops shown in the
illustration to fold down either or both seatbacks. These
loops can be tucked away when not in use.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
98
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedals
to move toward or away from the driver to provide
improved position with the steering wheel. The adjustable pedal system is designed to allow a greater range of
driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position.
The switch is located on the front side of the driver’s seat
cushion side shield.
Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
• The pedals can be adjusted while driving.
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in R
(Reverse) or when the Speed Control is ON. If the
vehicle is equipped with memory seats a message will
be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjustable
Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”).
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with memory seat
feature, your remote keyless entry transmitter or memory
seat buttons on the driver’s door panel can be used to
recall the adjustable pedals to saved positions. Refer to
the “Seats” section for details.
Adjustable Pedal Switch
Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
99
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become
limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in
the adjustable pedal’s path.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood. First, pull
the hood release lever located under the left side of the
instrument panel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
100
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Next, move to the outside of the vehicle and push the
safety catch to the left. The safety catch is located under
the center front edge of the hood.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6
inches (15 cm) and then drop it. This should secure both
latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully
closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches
are fully latched before driving.
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Each light is turned ON by pressing
the lens. Press the lens a second time to turn the light
OFF. The lights also turn on when a door is opened or the
dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the second
detent.
101
NOTE: The lights will remain on until the switch is
pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned
off before leaving the vehicle.
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
The interior lights will automatically turn off 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position
if they are switched on manually, or if a door is left open
to protect the battery. This includes the glove box, but not
the trunk. Turn the ignition switch ON, or cycle the
switchable lamp that was left on to restore the interior
light operation.
Dimmer Control
The dimmer control is part of the
headlamp switch, and is located on the
left side of the instrument panel. With
the parking lights or headlights on,
rotating the dimmer control upward
will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights.
Overhead Console
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
102
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dome Light Position
Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Interior light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom “OFF”
position. The interior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of
the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights,
instrument panel light dimming, interior lights, and fog
lights.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent.
This feature brightens all text displays such as the
odometer, Electronic Vehicle Information Center — if
equipped, and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on.
Headlight Switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Multi-Function Lever
The multi-function lever controls the operation of the
turn signals, headlight beam selection, and passing
lights. The lever is located on the left side of the steering
column.
103
Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel
Lights
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Turn to the second detent for headlight, park light and
instrument panel light operation.
Multi-Function Lever
Headlight Switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
104
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Headlights–If equipped
This system automatically turns your headlights ON or
OFF based on ambient light levels. To turn the system
ON, rotate the headlamp switch counter-clockwise to the
AUTO (A) position. When the system is ON, the Headlight Time Delay feature is also ON. This means your
headlights will stay ON for up to 90 seconds after you
turn the ignition switch OFF. To turn the Automatic
System OFF, move the headlamp switch out of the AUTO
(A) position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will come ON in the Automatic mode.
Headlamps On With Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
The headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
placed in the AUTO position. The headlights will also
turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were
turned on by this feature. This feature can be turned on or
off using the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — If equipped. Refer to ”Headlamps On With
Wipers” in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
section of this manual for details.
Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only)
The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime
Running Lights whenever the ignition switch is on, the
headlights are off, and the parking brake is off. The
headlight switch must be used for normal night time
driving.
Lights-on Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your vehicle in an unlighted area.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To activate the delay feature, turn off the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The 90 second delay interval begins when headlight switch is turned off. If the
headlights or park lights are turned back on or the
ignition switch is turned on, the delay will be cancelled.
If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they
will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
of turning the ignition off to activate this feature
The Headlamp delay time is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). Refer to “Delay Turning Headlamps Off” in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center section for details.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is on the headlamp
switch below the dimmer control. To activate the
front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or the
low beam headlights and press the fog lamp switch.
105
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights, or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Turn Signals
Move the Multi-Function Lever up or down and the
arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to
show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal
lights. You can signal a lane change by moving the lever
partially up or down without moving beyond the detent.
Releasing the lever at the detent will provide 3 flashes.
If either light has a very fast flash rate, check for a
defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light
when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the fuse
or indicator bulb is defective or there may be a circuit
failure.
NOTE: The message “Turn Signal On” will appear in
the electronic vehicle information center (EVIC) — if
equipped, and a continuous chime will be heard when
the vehicle has been driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km)
with either turn signal on.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
106
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch
Push the Multi-Function Lever away from you to switch
the headlights to HIGH beam. Pull the Lever towards
you to switch the headlights back to LOW beam.
Flash to Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the Multi-Function Lever toward you.
This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam
and remain on until the lever is released.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The wipers and washers are operated by the
multi-function lever. The lever is located on the
left side of the steering column. Rotate the end of
the control lever to select the desired wiper speed.
Multi-Function Lever
Windshield Washers
To use the front washer, push the lever in and hold while
spray is desired. If the lever is released while in the delay
range, the wiper will operate for two wipe cycles after the
lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pushed while in the OFF position, the
wipers will operate for two wipe cycles, then turn OFF.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rain Sensing Wipers—If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful when road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead
requires quick but brief wiping action. The sensitivity of
the system to the amount of water on the glass can be
adjusted with the rotary knob on the wiper stalk. Wiper
delay positions 1–6 indicate the rain sensing wiper sensitivity where 1 is the least sensitive, and 6 is the most
sensitive.
NOTE: The rain sensing feature will not operate when
the wiper switch is in the LOW or HIGH speed position.
CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper switch is
left in any position other than OFF.
107
NOTE: A customer programmable feature in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) allows the Rain
Sense feature to be turned off. Refer to “Personal Settings” in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center section of this manual for details.
Mist Feature
Push the wiper lever in to activate a single wipe to clear
off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. As long as
the lever is pushed in, the wipers will continue to
operate.
Headlamps On With Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
The headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
placed in the AUTO position. The headlights will also
turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were
turned on by this feature. This feature can be turned on or
off using the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — If equipped. Refer to ”Headlamps On With
Wipers” in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
section of this manual for details.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
108
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to the second detent for Low
speed wiper operation, or to the third detent for High
speed operation.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the lever to the
first detent position, then turn the end of the lever to
select the desired delay interval. There are 6 possible
delay wiper positions. The delay can be regulated from a
maximum of approximately 23 seconds between cycles,
to a cycle every second.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment on the passenger side
and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals.
Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not
radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few
seconds to flush out the residual water.
Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid
when “Low Washer Fluid” (Electronic Vehicle Information Center equipped vehicles), or the low washer symbol (non Electronic Vehicle Information Center equipped
vehicles) appears in the instrument cluster.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
Unlock the steering column by pulling out the handle
located directly below the column. To tilt the column
move the steering wheel up or down as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column pull out or push
in the steering wheel. Lock the steering column in
position by pushing the handle in until it fully engages.
109
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. The
telescoping adjustment must be locked while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving, or
driving without the telescoping adjustment locked
could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN—IF EQUIPPED
The power tilt/telescoping steering column lever is located below the multi-function lever on the steering
column. To tilt the column move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
Steering Column Handle
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
110
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Note: If your vehicle is equipped with the
memory seat feature your remote keyless entry transmitter or memory buttons on the driver’s door panel can be
used to recall the steering column tilt and telescopic
positions. Refer to the “Seats”section for details.
WARNING!
Moving the steering column while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering column you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the vehicle is stopped.
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS) — IF
EQUIPPED
WARNING!
TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded. The TCS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a
TCS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
111
The traction control system (TCS) warning
light is located in the instrument cluster. The
TCS light will flash as soon as the tires lose
traction and the wheels begin to spin. This
indicates that the TCS system is active. If the TCS
warning light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up
on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions. When the TCS warning light is illuminated continuously, the TCS is switched off. To return to
the enhanced vehicle stability offered by TCS, press the
TCS switch (the TCS warning light in the instrument
cluster goes out). Avoid spinning one drive wheel. This
may cause serious damage to the drive train and is not
covered by the DaimlerChrysler warranty.
To turn the system back ON, press the TCS OFF switch a
second time until the traction control Indicator turns OFF.
The TCS OFF switch is located on the center of the
instrument panel. To turn the traction control system OFF
press the TCS OFF switch until the traction control
Indicator in the instrument cluster lights up.
NOTE:
• The traction control system comes on each time the
ignition switch is turned ON. This will occur even if
you used the switch to turn the system OFF.
To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with
snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or gravel,
switch off the TCS system by pressing the TCS switch.
• The Traction Control system will make buzzing or
clicking sounds when in operation.
3
TCS OFF switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
112
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM (BAS)— IF EQUIPPED
BAS is standard on vehicles equipped with electronic
stability program (ESP). The BAS is designed to optimize
the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system applies optimum pressure to
the brakes in emergency braking conditions than might
otherwise be afforded solely by the driver’s braking style.
This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the antilock brake system (ABS). Applying the
brakes very quickly results in maximum BAS assistance.
To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking power during the stopping sequence.
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WARNING!
BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of
the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
The yellow BAS malfunction indicator light
comes on with the key in the ignition switch
turned to the “ON” position. The light should
go out with the engine running. If the BAS
malfunction indicator light comes on continuously with
the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in
either the BAS or the ESP system. If this light stays
illuminated, have the BAS and ESP checked at your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is
combined with the BAS on some models. The
yellow BAS malfunction indicator light and the
yellow ESP warning light in the instrument
cluster both come on with the key in the ignition switch
turned to the “ON” position. They should go out with the
engine running. If the BAS/ESP malfunction indicator
light comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in either the BAS or the
ESP system. If this light stays illuminated, have the BAS
and ESP checked at your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
113
ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM (ESP)— IF
EQUIPPED
WARNING!
ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded. The ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ESP-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
The ESP enhances directional control and reduces driving
wheel spin of the vehicle under various driving conditions. The system operates when the vehicle speed is
greater than 7.8 mph (12.6 km/h).
The ESP system corrects for over/understeering of the
vehicle by applying brakes to the appropriate wheel.
Engine torque is also limited.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
114
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The ESP warning light, located in the instrument cluster, starts to flash as soon as the ESP
system sensor’s information varies from the
driver’s intended path. The ESP warning light
also flashes when traction control is activated. If the ESP
warning light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up
on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions. When the ESP warning light is illuminated continuously, the ESP is switched off. To return to
the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP, press the
ESP OFF switch (the ESP warning light in the instrument
cluster goes out). Avoid spinning one drive wheel. This
may cause serious damage to the drive train and is not
covered by the DaimlerChrysler warranty.
To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with
snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or gravel,
switch off the ESP system by pressing the ESP OFF
switch.
ESP OFF Switch
With the ESP system switched off, the engine torque
reduction feature is cancelled. Therefore, the enhanced
vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable. ESP always operates under braking, even with the switch in the
OFF position. When the ESP system is disabled (if one
drive wheel loses traction and begins to spin) the brake is
applied by the ESP system to control wheel slip. This
wheel slip control is active at vehicle speeds between
approximately 24 mph (40 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
115
completely to the left and then to the right. The BAS
malfunction indicator light should go out.
CAUTION!
If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised, the
engine must be shut off (key in the ignition switch to
the OFF/LOCK or ACC position). Otherwise the ESP
will immediately be engaged and will apply the rear
wheel brakes.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, this device takes over the accelerator
operation at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h). The
speed control switch consists of a stalk mounted lever
located on the steering column.
Synchronizing ESP
The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is
combined with the BAS on some models. If the
power supply was interrupted (battery disconnected or discharged), the ESP/BAS malfunction indicator light may be illuminated with the engine
running. Turn the steering wheel completely to the left
and then to the right. The ESP/BAS malfunction indicator light should go out.
If the power supply was interrupted (battery
disconnected or discharged), the BAS malfunction indicator light may be illuminated with
the engine running. Turn the steering wheel
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Electronic Speed Control Lever
3
116
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Activate:
Push and release the speed control lever (“ON/OFF”)
once and an LED on the lever will illuminate indicating
that the electronic speed control is ON. To turn the
system OFF, Push and release the lever (“ON/OFF”)
again and the system and indicator will turn off.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidently
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you aren’t using it.
To Set At A Desired Speed:
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, pull the
lever toward you and release. Release the accelerator and
the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: Speed control will only function in third, fourth,
or fifth gear when in the Autostick Mode — if equipped.
NOTE: The speed control may not engage if a different
size tire is installed on one wheel, such as the compact
spare tire.
To Deactivate:
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the lever away
from you (“CANCEL”) or normal braking while slowing
the vehicle will deactivate the speed control without
erasing the memory. Pushing and releasing the lever
(“ON/OFF”) or turning off the ignition erases the speed
memory.
To Resume Speed:
To resume a previously set speed, push the lever up and
release (“ACC/RES”). Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary the Speed Setting:
When the speed control is set, speed can be increased by
pushing the lever up and holding (“ACC/RES”). When
the lever is released, a new set speed will be established.
Pushing the lever up and releasing (“ACC/RES”) once
will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed increase. Each
time the lever is pushed up and released, speed increases
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
so that pushing the lever up and releasing three times
will increase speed by 3 mph (4.8 km/h), etc.
117
On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without speed control.
To decrease speed while speed control is set, push the
lever down and hold (“COAST”). Release the lever when
the desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be
set.
Pushing down and releasing the lever (“COAST”) once
will result in a 1 mph (2 km/h) speed decrease. Each time
the lever is pushed down and released, speed decreases.
To Accelerate For Passing:
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
NOTE: The speed control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal.
Four speed automatic transmissions will experience a
downshift to 3rd gear while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This downshift to 3rd gear is necessary to
maintain vehicle set speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
3
118
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
OVERHEAD CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights,
an optional universal garage door opener (HomeLinkt),
storage for sunglasses, and optional power sunroof
switches.
Courtesy/Reading Lights
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy/
reading lights.
Press the lens to turn these lights on. Press a second time
to turn the lights off.
The lights also turn on when a front door or rear door is
opened. The lights will also turn on when the unlock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed.
Sunglasses Storage
At the rear of the console a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a 9push/push9 design.
Push the finger depression on the overhead console to
open. Push the finger depression to close.
Overhead Console
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
The HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver replaces up to
three remote controls (hand held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, or home lighting. It triggers these devices at the
push of a button. The Universal Transceiver operates off
your vehicle’s battery and charging system; no batteries
are needed.
119
WARNING!
A moving garage door can cause injury to people and
pets in the path of the door. People or pets could be
seriously or fatally injured. Only use this transceiver
with a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage
door opener without these safety features it could
cause injury or death. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.homelink.com for safety
information or assistance.
NOTE: The HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Theft Alarm is active.
For additional information on HomeLinkt, call 1–800–
355–3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com.
Programming HomeLink
NOTE: When programming a garage door opener, it is
advised to park outside the garage. It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed to
HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
120
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display which includes
HomeLink system messages. The EVIC is located in the
upper part of the cluster between the speedometer and
tachometer.
longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat step one to
program a second and/or third hand-held transmitter to
the remaining two HomeLink buttons.
HomeLink Buttons
WARNING!
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons, and
release only when the EVIC display shows “Channels
Cleared” (after 20 seconds). Do not hold the buttons for
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run the vehicle’s exhaust while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the
path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can
cause serious injury or death to people and pets or
damage to objects.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3
inches (3-8 cm) away from the HomeLink buttons.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink
button that you want to train and the hand-held transmitter buttons. Do not release the buttons until step 4
has been completed.
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with
procedures noted in the 9Gate Operator/Canadian Programming9 section.
121
4. The EVIC display will show “Channel X Training”
(where X is Channel 1, 2, or 3). Release both buttons after
the EVIC display shows “Channel X Trained”.
NOTE: If the EVIC display shows “Did Not Train”
repeat steps 2–4.
5. Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and
observe the EVIC display. If the EVIC display shows
“Channel X Transmit” (where X is Channel 1, 2, or 3),
programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released.
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, begin with 9Programming9 step two. Do not repeat
step one.
NOTE: If your hand-held transmitter appears to program the universal transceiver, but your garage door
does not operate using the transmitter and your garage
door opener was manufactured after 1995, your garage
door opener may have a multiple security code system
(rolling code system). Please proceed to steps 6–8 to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
122
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
complete the programming of a rolling code equipped
device (most common garage door openers require this
step.
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit)
in the garage, locate the 9learn9 or 9smart9 button. This
can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the 9learn9 or 9smart9 button.
(The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.)
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step
eight.
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two
seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button.
Repeat the (press/hold/release( sequence a second time,
and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener
(or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this
sequence a third time to complete the programming.
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, begin with 9Programming9 step two. Do not repeat
step one. For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
Canadian Programming/Gate Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to 9time-out9 (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to 9time-out9 in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties
programming a gate operator by using the 9Programming9 procedures (regardless of where you live), replace
(Programming HomeLink( step 3 with the following:
NOTE: If programming a garage door opener or gate
operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the
9cycling9 process to prevent possible overheating.
HomeLink should now activate your rolling code
equipped device.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
123
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button
while you press and release every two seconds (9cycle9)
your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has
successfully been accepted by HomeLink. The EVIC
display will show “Channel X Trained” (where X is
Channel 1, 2, or 3). Proceed with 9Programming9 step
four to complete.
• Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons and
release only when the EVIC display shows “Channels
Cleared” (after 20 seconds). Release both buttons. Do
not hold for longer that 30 seconds. HomeLink is now
in the train (or learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with 9Programming9
- step 2.
Using HomeLink
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the
device may also be used at any time. In the event that
there are still programming difficulties or questions,
contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 1-800-3553515.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button
To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink
button previously trained, follow these steps:
Erasing HomeLink Buttons
To erase programming from the three buttons (individual
buttons cannot be erased but can be 9reprogrammed9 note below), follow the step noted:
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at:
www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The EVIC display will show “Channel X Transmit”
(where X is Channel 1, 2, or 3) for 20 seconds and then
change to “Channel X Training”. Without releasing the
HomeLink button, proceed with 9Programming9 step 2.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
124
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Security
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the frequencies.
To erase all of the previously trained frequencies, hold
down both outside buttons until the green light begins to
flash.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
HomeLinkt is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls,
Inc.
Press and hold the switch rearward to fully open the
sunroof. The sunroof can be stopped at any position
between closed and full open. Momentarily pressing the
switch rearward will activate the Express Open Feature,
causing the sunroof to open automatically.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press and hold the button in the center of the sunroof
switch to open the vent. The sunroof can be stopped at
any position between closed and full vent. To close the
sunroof from the vent position, press and hold the switch
forward. Releasing the switch will stop the movement of
the sunroof and the sunroof will remain in the partial
vent position until the switch is pushed forward again.
NOTE: The power sunroof switches remain active for
up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned
off. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
This feature is programmable through the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped. Refer
to “Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit” under
“Personal Settings” in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center section of this manual for details.
125
and the glass will automatically stop at the comfort stop
position. Pressing the switch rearward again will fully
open the sunroof.
During the Express Open operation, any movement of
the switch will stop the sunroof and it will remain in a
partial open position. Again, momentarily pressing the
switch rearward will activate the Express Open Feature.
To close the sunroof, hold the switch in the forward
position. Again, any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open
condition until the switch is pushed forward again.
The sunshade can be opened manually. It will also open
as the sunroof opens. The sunshade cannot be closed if
the sunroof is open.
Express Open Feature
The sunroof is equipped with an intermediate stop or
comfort stop position. This feature is designed to eliminate wind buffeting at vehicle speeds between 20-40 mph
(32-64 km/h). To operate this feature, momentarily press
the switch rearward to activate the Express Open Feature
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
126
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There are two 12-volt electrical outlets on this vehicle.
Both of the outlets are protected by an automatic reset
circuit breaker. The automatic circuit breaker restores
power when the overload is removed.
127
NOTE: If desired, the power outlet next to the ash tray
receiver (if equipped) can be converted by your authorized dealer to provide power with the ignition switch in
the LOCK position.
The 12 volt power outlet next to the ash receiver tray (if
equipped with an optional Smoker’s Package) has power
available only when the ignition is on. This outlet will
also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit.
WARNING!
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on
the center console on vehicles not equipped with the
ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury
could result.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
3
128
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The center console outlet is powered directly from the
battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into
this outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent
engine starting.
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent engine
starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory
bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders
The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the
center console.
129
Push down on the cover (300 Touring, and 300C only) as
shown to expose the cupholders. Close the cover when
the cupholders are no longer needed.
3
Front Seat Cupholders — 300
Front Seat Cupholders
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
130
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Seat Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cup holders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide
convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while
maintaining a resting place for the rear occupants’ elbows.
STORAGE
Console Features
The center console includes a large internal storage bin.
The storage bin has a rubber mat for noise control. The
bin is also large enough to hold a portable AC/DC
converter to power lap tops, games, or other electrical
equipment. Two slots at the top right side of the bin
provide clearance for power cords to pass conveniently
out of the bin with the lid closed. This feature is ideal for
games, laptops, cell phones or other electrical equipment.
A four-slot coin holder can hold US dollar coins or
Canadian one and two-dollar coins, as well as quarters,
dimes and nickels. The bin has a Front-opening lid for
easy access inside by either the driver or front passenger.
There are also two shift bezel cubby bins with rubber
mats for holding small items. For vehicles not equipped
with the navigation radio, an extra storage bin is provided below the climate controls that holds up to four CD
jewel cases. The inside portion of the arm rest lid contains
a pen holder, a tissue holder, and a tire gauge holder.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
The tie-downs located on cargo area floor and on the rear
trim panels should be used to safely secure loads when
vehicle is moving.
WARNING!
• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision a hook could pull loose and allow the child
seat to come loose. A child could be badly injured.
Use only the anchors provided for child seat
tethers.
• The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and
vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for
loading your vehicle:
131
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the
vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WARNING!
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
3
132
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The automatic load leveling system will provide a level
riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15
hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
to complete depending on road surface conditions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
▫ Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
m Instruments And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
m Standard Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
m Premium Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
m Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 140
m Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)–
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
m Setting The Analog Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
m Sales Code REF — AM/FM/CD (Single Disc)
Radio With Optional Satellite Radio And
Hands Free Phone Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Telephone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Navigation — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 159
▫ Operation Instructions - CD Mode . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
4
134
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
m Sales Code RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-Disc) Radio
With Optional Satellite Radio, Hands Free Phone,
And Vehicle Entertainment Systems (Ves)
Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ Operating Instructions — Tape Player . . . . . . . 179
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 164
▫ Rewind (RW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
▫ Operation Instructions (CD Mode For CD Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . 169
▫ Tape Eject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ Load/Eject Button
(CD Mode For CD Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . 170
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
▫ Operation Instructions (CD Mode For MP3 Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ Load/Eject Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . 174
m Sales Code RAK – AM/FM/Cassette/CD (6-Disc)
Radio With Optional Satellite Radio, Hands Free
Phone, Video, MP3, And WMA Capabilities . . 175
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 176
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
▫ Seek Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
▫ Fast Forward (FF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
▫ Scan Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ Changing Tape Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ Metal Tape Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ Pinch Roller Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ Noise Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ Operation Instructions (CD Mode For CD Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ Load/Eject Button
(CD Mode For CD Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . 181
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
▫ Operation Instructions (CD Mode For MP3 And WMA Audio Play) . . 185
▫ Load/Eject Button
(CD Mode For MP3 And WMA Play) . . . . . . . 185
▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
m Remote Sound System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . 190
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
m Satellite Radio — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
▫ Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ENS/SID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode In REF, RAQ, And RAK
Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
▫ Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
m Radio General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
▫ Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
▫ Selecting a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
▫ Two Types Of Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
▫ Storing And Selecting Pre-Set Channels . . . . . . 188
▫ Electrical Disturbances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
▫ Using The PTY (Program Type) Button
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
▫ PTY Button 9Scan9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
▫ PTY Button 9Seek9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
135
▫ AM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
▫ FM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
m Cassette Tape And Player Maintenance . . . . . . 192
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
136
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
m CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
▫ Winter Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
m Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . 194
▫ Vacation Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
m Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
▫ Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
▫ Climate Controls — Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
▫ Outside Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
▫ Automatic Temperature Control —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
▫ A/C Air Filter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
▫ Summer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
137
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
4
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
138
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STANDARD INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
139
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
140
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light shows low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the
engine is started. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as
possible. A continuous chime will sound when this
light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
4. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled about one mile with the turn signals on, a chime
will sound to alert you to turn the signals off. If either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for a defective
outside light bulb.
5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Low Fuel Indicator Light
The Low Fuel Light will turn on when there is
approximately 2 gallons (9 liters) of fuel remaining in the tank. This light will remain on until
fuel is added.
6. Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
messages. Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center
for specific messages (only on vehicles equipped with
steering wheel mounted switches).
3. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This light shows the front fog lights are ON.
NOTE: On non-EVIC equipped vehicles the odometer
is located here.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
141
7. Tachometer
The red segments indicate the maximum permissible
engine revolutions-per-minute (r.p.m. x 1000) for each
gear range. Before reaching the red area, ease up on the
accelerator.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
8. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light illuminates, and will be accompanied
by a single chime to warn of an overheated
engine condition. The engine temperature is
critically hot, and the vehicle should be turned off
immediately. The vehicle should be serviced as soon
as possible.
10. Brake Assist System (BAS) Warning
Light/Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Warning
Light — If Equipped
The yellow Brake Assist System (BAS) malfunction indicator light in the instrument
cluster comes on with the key in the ignition
switch turned to the “ON” position. The
light should go out with the engine running. If the
BAS malfunction indicator light comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in either the BAS, or the Electronic Stability
Program (ESP) system. If this light stays illuminated,
have the BAS and ESP checked at your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
The yellow malfunction indicator lamp for
the ESP is combined with the BAS on some
models. The yellow BAS malfunction indicator light and the yellow ESP warning light in
9. Anti-Lock Brake Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System.
The light will turn on when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as
long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
142
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the instrument cluster both come on with the key in
the ignition switch turned to the “ON” position. They
should go out with the engine running. If the BAS/
ESP malfunction indicator light comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in either the BAS or the ESP system. If this
light stays illuminated, have the BAS and ESP checked
at your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
11. Airbag Light
This light turns on and remains on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the light is not
on during starting, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
12. Brake System Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking
brake application. If the brake light turns on,
it may indicate that the parking brake is
applied, there is a low brake fluid level or there is a
problem with the anti-lock brake system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an
accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS), are also
equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD).
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light
will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair
to the ABS system is required.
The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
the ON position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
143
13. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator
Light/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light
— If Equipped
If this indicator light flashes during acceleration, apply as little throttle as possible. While
driving, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt
your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions, and do not switch off the ESP, or TCS
— if equipped.
14. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
144
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
15. Trip Odometer Button
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads (H),
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H”, and you hear continuous chimes, turn the
engine off immediately, and call for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see Section 7 of this manual. Follow
the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure
Cap paragraph.
Trip Odometer Button — Standard Cluster
The word 9TRIP9 will appear when this button is pressed.
Push in and hold the button for two seconds when the
trip odometer is displayed to reset it to 0 miles or
kilometers. A second press of the button will display the
outside temperature in the odometer.
Trip Odometer Button — Premium Cluster
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of the two trip odometer settings. The letter “A” or
“B” will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in
and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip
odometer to 0 miles or kilometers. The odometer must be
in trip mode to reset.
16. High Beam Light
This light shows that the headlights are on high
beam. Push the Multi-Function lever away from
the steering wheel to switch the headlights to high
beam.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
17. Transmission Range Indicator
This display indicator shows the automatic transmission
gear selection.
18. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a bulb
check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb
check or when driving, if the driver seat belt remains
unbuckled, the Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or
remain on continuously. Refer to 9Enhanced Driver
Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert™)9 in the Occupant Restraints section for more information.
19. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
20. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control system. If a problem is detected the light will come on while
the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key
when the vehicle has completely stopped and the gear
145
selector is placed in the PARK position. The light
should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine
running your vehicle will usually be drivable, however, see your dealer for service as soon as possible. If
the light is flashing when the engine is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The
light will come on when the ignition is first turned on
and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does
not come on during starting, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.
21. Tire Pressure Monitor Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light will turn on continuously when
there is a Low tire pressure condition. The
light will also turn on if a problem exist with
any tire sensor. When a system fault is
detected, the indicator lamp will flash repetitively for
ten seconds. The flash cycle will repeat every ten
minutes or until the fault condition is removed and
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
146
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
reset. The light will remain on or flashing until the tire
pressure is properly set or the problem with the sensor
is corrected.
This light will turn on momentarily as a bulb check when
the engine is started.
When the tire pressure monitoring system warning light
is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. You should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as
indicated on the tire and loading information placard.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Each tire, including the spare, should be checked
monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation
pressure as specified in the tire and loading information
placard.
22. Voltage Light
This light monitors the electrical system voltage. The light should turn on momentarily as
the engine is started. If the light stays on or turns on
while driving, it indicates a problem with the charging
system. Immediate service should be obtained.
23. Malfunction Indicator Light
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic
system called OBD that monitors engine and
automatic transmission control systems. The
light will illuminate when the key is in the ON
position before engine start. If the bulb does not come
on when turning the key from OFF to ON, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc. may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
The Malfunction Indicator Light flashes to alert you to
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)–If Equipped
147
• System Status
• Vehicle information warning message displays
• Tire Pressure Monitor System — If Equipped
• Personal Settings (customer programmable features)
• Compass display
• Outside temperature display
• Trip computer functions
• UConnect™ hands-free communication system displays — If Equipped
• Navigation system screens — If Equipped
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display. It is located in the
upper part of the cluster between the speedometer and
tachometer. Vehicles equipped with steering wheel
mounted switches (described in this section) will also be
equipped with the EVIC. This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety of useful information
by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel.
The EVIC consists of the following:
• Audio mode display
Press and release the MENU button and the
mode displayed will change between Trip
Functions, Navigation (If Equipped), System
Status, Personal Settings, and Telephone (If
Equipped).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
148
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button accepts a selected choice. The Function Select
button also advances the radio preset when the
EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/Audio screen.
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime)
• Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
• Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
Use the SCROLL buttons to scroll through Trip
Functions, Navigation (If Equipped), System
Status Messages, and Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features). The SCROLL
buttons also seek up and down (radio station or CD track
number).
• Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
chime)
The AUDIO MODE SELECT button is used to
select the Compass/Temp/Audio screen. If
Compass/Temp/Audio is already being displayed when the AUDIO MODE SELECT button is pressed, the radio mode will change from AM to
FM to Tape to CD, or to Satellite (SAT) depending on
which radio is in the vehicle. This button can also be used
to return to a previous navigation menu selection.
• Memory #1/#2 Profile Set
When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following
messages.
• Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
chime)
• RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
• Memory #1/#2 Profile Recall
• Memory System Disabled – Vehicle Not In Park (with
a single chime)
• Memory System Disabled – Seat Belt Buckled (with a
single chime)
• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in Park
• Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph)
• Door (S) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
motion)
• Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)
• Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)
• Adjustable Pedals Disabled – Cruise Engaged (with a
single chime) — only available on vehicles equipped
with memory seats.
• Adjustable Pedals Disabled – Vehicle In Reverse (with
a single chime) — only available on vehicles equipped
with memory seats.
• Channel 1, 2, OR 3 Transmit
• Channel 1, 2, OR 3 Training
• Channel 1, 2, OR 3 Trained
• Clearing Channels
• Channels Cleared
149
• Did Not Train
• Left Front Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
“Starting And Operating, Tire Section”
• Left Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
“Starting And Operating, Tire Section”
• Right Front Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer
to “Starting And Operating, Tire Section”
• Right Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer
to “Starting And Operating, Tire Section”
• Check TPM System (with a single chime). Refer to
“Starting And Operating, Tire Section”
• Service Park Assist System (with a single chime)
Trip Functions
Press and release the MENU button until one of the Trip
Functions is displayed in the EVIC.
Use the SCROLL buttons to cycle through all the Trip
Computer functions.
• Channels Defaulted
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
150
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The Trip Functions mode displays information on the
following:
• Average Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset it will go to 0.0.
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined using the MPG for the last few minutes. This
is not resettable.
• Trip A
Shows the total distance travelled for trip A since the last
reset.
• Trip B
Shows the total distance travelled for trip B since the last
reset.
• Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
• Display Units of Measure in:
Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button when
in this display until “US” or “METRIC” appears to make
your selection.
To Reset The Display
Pressing and releasing the FUNCTION SELECT button
once will clear the resettable function currently being
displayed. Reset will only occur if a resettable function is
currently being displayed. To reset all resettable functions, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button a
second time within 3 seconds of resetting the currently
displayed function (>Reset ALL will be displayed during
this 3 second window).
Compass Display
Press and release the compass button to display one of eight compass readings to indicate
the direction the vehicle is facing, and the
outside temperature.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the
need to manually set the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
360° turns in an area free from large metal or metallic
objects until the “CAL” message displayed in the EVIC
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” message
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually.
To put into a Calibration Mode: Turn on the ignition
switch. Press and hold the compass button for approximately 2 seconds. Use the SCROLL buttons until “Calibrate Compass” is highlighted. Press and release the
151
FUNCTION SELECT button to start the calibration. The
message “CAL” will appear in the EVIC. Complete one
or more 360° turns in an area free from large metal objects
until the “CAL” message turns off. The compass will now
function normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. If this occurs, the compass variance must be set.
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the overhead console. This is where the compass sensor is
located.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
152
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To set the variance: Turn the ignition switch ON. Press
and hold the compass button for approximately 2 seconds. Use the SCROLL buttons until “Compass Variance”
is highlighted. The “Compass Variance” message and the
last variance zone number will be displayed. Press and
release FUNCTION SELECT button until the proper
variance zone is selected according to the map. Press and
release the compass button to exit.
Telephone — If Equipped
Press and release the MENU button until Telephone is
displayed in the EVIC.
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC provides the following telephone information:
• Phone status: idle, voice mail, roaming, battery
strength and signal strength in increments of 20 percent.
• Call status: Incoming call, connecting, connected, air
time in minutes and seconds, call ended, call failed,
roaming and no phone connection.
• U-Connect Active.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Caller ID phone number display.
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
you have voice mail.
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC will
display the following telephone symbols:
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the
signal strength of the U-Connect phone. The
number of horizontal bars increase as the
Signal strength of the U-Connect phone signal inStrength creases.
Voice
Mail
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate a
text message.
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate an
incoming call.
Text
Message
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
the U-Connect phone is currently in analog
mode.
Battery
Strength
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the
battery strength of the U-Connect phone.
Incoming Call
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
a phone connection has been made.
Analog
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
the U-Connect phone is currently in roaming.
153
Call in
Progress
Roaming
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
154
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
the U-Connect phone is currently not available.
Phone
Not
Available
Navigation — If Equipped
Navigation Display Control
Press and release the MENU button until Navigation is
displayed in the EVIC. When the Navigation System is
On, the steering wheel buttons can be used to select the
Map or Menu display on the Navigation Unit. When the
Menu display is active, the SCROLL buttons can be used
to scroll through the list, the FUNCTION SELECT button
can be used to select an item, and the AUDIO MODE
SELECT button can be used to return to the previous
menu. When the Map display is active, pressing the
FUNCTION SELECT button will change the Navigation
Unit Display to the Menu.
Turn By Turn Directions
If Turn by Turn Navigation is enabled through Personal
Settings, the Navigation System will provide turn by turn
directions to the programmed destination in the EVIC
display. The name of the approaching road is displayed
at the top of the screen, followed by an arrow to show the
direction of the turn and the remaining distance to the
turn counted down.
Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features)
This allows the driver to set and recall features when the
transmission is in PARK.
Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings is displayed in the EVIC.
Use the SCROLL buttons to display one of the following
choices:
Language
When in this display you may select one of five languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
functions and navigation system. Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display selects English, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano, or Francais. As you
continue the displayed information will be shown in the
selected language.
Display English or Metric
The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system units can be
changed between English and Metric.
Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button when
in this display until “US” or “METRIC” appears to make
your selection.
Lock Doors Automatically at 15 MPH (24 Km/h)
When ON is selected all doors lock automatically when
the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph (24 km/h). Press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button when in this
display until “ON” or “OFF” appears to make your
selection.
Auto Unlock On Exit
When ON is selected all the vehicle’s doors will unlock
when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped
and the transmission is in P (Park) or N (Neutral)
155
position. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button when in this display until “ON” or “OFF” appears
to make your selection.
Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st
When DRIVER’S DOOR 1ST is selected only the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the remote
keyless entry unlock button and require a second press to
unlock the remaining locked doors. When REMOTE
UNLOCK ALL DOORS is selected all of the doors will
unlock at the first press of the remote keyless entry
unlock button. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button when in this display until “DRIVER’S
DOOR 1ST” or “ALL DOORS” appears to make your
selection.
Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock
(Available with Memory Seat Only)
When ON is selected the memory seat, mirror, and radio
settings will return to the memory set position when the
remote keyless entry “Unlock” button is pressed. If this
feature is not selected then the memory seat, mirror, and
radio settings can only return to the memory set position
using the door mounted switch. Press and release the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
156
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
FUNCTION SELECT button when in this display until
“ON” or “OFF” appears to make your selection.
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when
the remote keyless entry “Lock” button is pressed. This
feature may be selected with or without the flash lights
on lock/unlock feature. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button when in this display until “ON” or
“OFF” appears to make your selection.
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the
remote keyless entry transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button when in this display until “ON” or “OFF” appears
to make your selection.
Delay Turning Headlamps Off
When this feature is selected the driver can choose to
have the headlamps remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button when in this display until 0, 30, 60,
or 90 appears to make your selection.
Headlamps On With Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When ON is selected and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature. Press and
release the FUNCTION SELECT button when in this
display until “ON” or “OFF” appears to make your
selection.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in this section.
Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers — If Equipped
When ON is selected the system senses moisture on the
windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the
driver. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
when in this display until “ON” or “OFF” appears to
make your selection. When OFF the system reverts to
standard intermittent wiper operation.
Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system, DVD video system,
power sunroof, and power outlets will remain active for
up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned
off. Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature. Press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button when in this
display until “Off”, “45 sec.”, “5 min.”, “10 min.”, “30
min.”, or “60 min.” appears to make your selection.
Turn Headlamps on with Remote Key Unlock
When this feature is selected the headlamps will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button when
in this display until “OFF”, “30 sec.”, “60 sec.”, or “90
sec.” appears to make your selection.
Tilt Mirrors Down on Reverse — If Equipped
When ON is selected the outside rearview mirrors will
tilt down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE with
157
the ignition switch in the RUN position. The mirrors
move back to their previous position when the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button when in this display until “ON” or
“OFF” appears to make your selection.
Park Assist System — If Equipped
When ON is selected and the driver places the gear
selector in Reverse or Neutral the system will scan for
objects behind the vehicle. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button when in this display until “ON” or
“OFF” appears to make your selection.
Confirmation of Voice Commands — If Equipped
When ON is selected all voice commands from the
U-Connect system are confirmed. Press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button when in this display until
“ON” or “OFF” appears to make your selection.
Turn by Turn Navigation — If Equipped
When ON is selected the Turn-by-Turn directions will
appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route. Press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT button when in this display
until “ON” or “OFF” appears to make your selection.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
158
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatically Move Seat Back on Exit (Available
with Memory Seat Only)
When ON is selected, the driver’s seat moves rearward 5
cm (2 inches) or to the farthest rearward position if this
distance is less than 5 cm (2 inches) when the key is
removed from the ignition switch so that the driver can
more easily exit the vehicle. The seat will return to the
memorized seat location (if Recall Memory with Remote
Key Unlock is set to ON) when the remote keyless entry
transmitter is used to unlock the door. Press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT button when in this display
until “ON” or “OFF” appears to make your selection.
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK
To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument
panel, press and hold the button until the setting is
correct.
Analog Clock
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SALES CODE REF — AM/FM/CD (SINGLE DISC)
RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO AND
HANDS FREE PHONE CAPABILITY
159
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition
is ON.
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player or Satellite Radio (if equipped).
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek
up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain
tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding the button will bypass stations without
stopping until you release it.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
160
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. 9MUTE9 will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the
radio ON /OFF, or turning ON/OFF the ignition, will
cancel the MUTE feature.
NOTE: In Hands Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the
MUTE button mutes the microphone.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press SCAN a second time.
PSCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the PSCAN button, causes the tuner to scan
through preset stations, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
preset station before continuing to the next. To stop the
search, press PSCAN a second time.
Time Button
Press the time button and the time of day will be
displayed for 5 seconds.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune /
Audio control.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side Tune
/ Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune / Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or
counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will be displayed. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will be displayed. Turn the TUNE control to the right or
left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREB will
be displayed. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will
be displayed. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
161
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
be displayed. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Press the tune control again or wait 5 seconds to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
SET Button (Radio Mode) To SET The Push-Button
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button,
the station will continue to play but will not be stored
into push-button memory.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM,12 FM and
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
162
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can
be selected by pressing the push-button twice.
Every time a preset button is used a corresponding
button number will be displayed.
Preset Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
Operation Instructions - CD Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Inserting The Compact Disc (Single CD Player)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display.
If the volume control is ON, the unit will switch to CD
mode and begin to play. The display will show the track
number and play time in minutes and seconds. Play will
begin at the start of track one.
NOTE:
• You may insert or eject a disc with the radio or ignition
switch OFF.
• If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
Player.
• This radio does not play discs with MP3 tracks.
SEEK Button (CD Mode)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next track
on the CD. Press the left side of the button to return to the
beginning of the current track, or return to the beginning
of the previous track if the CD is within the first 10
seconds of the current selection.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MUTE Button ((CD Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. 9MUTE9 will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
will return. Rotating the volume control or turning OFF
the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers.
SCAN Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track.
To stop the scan function, press the button a second time.
EJECT Button (CD Mode)
Press this button and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. The
unit will switch to the last selected mode.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.
TIME Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD
playing time to time of day. The time of day will be
displayed for 5 seconds.
163
RW/FF (CD Mode)
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player
will begin to fast forward until FF is released. The RW
(Reverse) button works in a similar manner.
NOTE: RND Button (Random Play Button) (CD Mode)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
164
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone — If
Equipped
Refer to the HANDS FREE PHONE (UConnect™) section
of the Owner’s Manual.
SALES CODE RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-DISC) RADIO
WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO, HANDS
FREE PHONE, AND VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEMS (VES) CAPABILITIES
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio — If
Equipped
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition
is ON.
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player, Satellite Radio, or Vehicle Entertainment
System (VES) (if equipped).
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek
up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain
165
tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding the button will bypass stations without
stopping until you release it.
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. 9MUTE9 will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the
radio ON/OFF, or turning OFF the ignition will also
return the sound from the speakers
NOTE: In Hands Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the
MUTE button mutes the microphone.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press SCAN a second time.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
166
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MSG or INFO Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MSG or INFO button for an RBDS station (one
with call letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio
Text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode
only).
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
Time Button
Press the time button and the time of day will be
displayed for 5 seconds.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or
counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune /
Audio control.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side
Tune / Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune / Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or
left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side
speakers.
167
Toggle the PTY button to select the following format
types:
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone,
balance and fade.
RND/PTY Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time
out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the PTY button or
turning the TUNE rotary knob within 5 seconds will
allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio
stations do not currently broadcast PTY information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Program Type
No program type or
undefined
Adult Hits
Alert Alert
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Emergency Test
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
16 Digit-Character
Display
None
Adult_Hits
Alert Alert
Classical
Classic_Rock
College
Country
Emergency Test
Foreign_Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
4
168
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
Rhythm_and_Blues
Religious_Music
Religious_Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft_Rock
Soft_R_&_B
Sports
Talk
Top_40
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
SET/DIR Button (Radio Mode) To SET The
Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET/DIR
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET/DIR
button, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into push-button memory.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/DIR button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM,12
FM and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
push-button memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the push-button
twice.
Every time a preset button is used a corresponding
button number will be displayed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
Operation Instructions - (CD MODE For CD Audio
Play)
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
NOTE: Note: This Radio is capable of playing compact
discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable
compact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks
and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display.
169
You may eject a disc with the radio OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
SEEK Button (CD MODE For CD Audio Play)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next
selection on the CD. Press the left side of the button to
return to the beginning of the current selection, or return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is
within the first 10 seconds of the current selection.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
170
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MUTE Button (CD MODE For CD Audio Play)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. 9MUTE9 will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the
radio ON/OFF, or turning OFF the ignition will also
return the sound from the speakers.
Radio display will show 9LOADING DISC9 when the disc
is loading, and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
SCAN Button (CD MODE For CD Audio Play)
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
LOAD / EJT - Eject
Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
Radio display will show 9EJECTING DISC9 when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode For CD Audio
Play)
Press and hold the LOAD/ EJT button for 5 seconds and
all CDs will be ejected from the radio.
LOAD/ EJECT - Load
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays 9LOAD DISC9 insert the
CD into the player.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
9INSERT DISC” for 10 seconds. If no discs are inserted
within 10 seconds “NO DISCS LOADED” will be displayed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
TIME Button (CD MODE For CD Audio Play)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE For CD Audio Play)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
TUNE Control (CD MODE For CD Audio Play)
Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone,
Fade, and Balance. See Radio Mode.
AM/FM Button (CD MODE For CD Audio Play)
Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.
RND/PTY Button (Random Play Button) (CD
MODE For CD Audio Play)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
171
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
BUTTONS 1 - 6 (CD MODE For CD Audio Play)
Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files, however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported media (disc types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
172
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported medium formats (file systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as 9keep disc open after
writing9 are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Supported MP3 file formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
• Maximum number of directory levels: 15
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders: 100
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator 9.9 and a
3-character extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator 9.9 and a
3-character extension)
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MPEG
Specification
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
Bit rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
173
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For MP3 Audio
Play)
SEEK Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next
MP3 File. Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays
the beginning of the MP3 file. Pressing the button within
the first ten seconds plays the previous file.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
174
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
LOAD/ EJECT - Load
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays 9LOAD DISC9 insert the
CD into the player.
Radio display will show 9LOADING DISC9 when the disc
is loading.
LOAD / EJECT - Eject
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
Radio display will show 9EJECTING DISC9 when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
9INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes the radio
will go to the previous tuner mode.
MSG or INFO Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Press and MSG or INFO button while playing MP3 disc.
The radio scrolls through the following TAG information:
Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the MSG or INFO button once more to return to
9elapsed time9 priority mode.
Press and hold the MSG or INFO button while in the
message display priority mode or elapsed time display
priority mode will display the song title for each file.
RW/FF (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Press the FF side of the button to move forward through
the MP3 selection.
TUNE Control (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of
Tone, Balance, and Fade.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
AM/FM Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Switches back to Radio mode.
RND/ PTY Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Pressing this button plays files randomly.
SET/DIR Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Press the SET/DIR Button to display folders, when
playing an MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure.
Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or
move through available folders. Press the TUNE control
to select a folder.
175
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VESt) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate Video Entertainment System (VESt)
Guide.
SALES CODE RAK – AM/FM/CASSETTE/CD
(6-DISC) RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE
RADIO, HANDS FREE PHONE, VIDEO, MP3, and
WMA CAPABILITIES
Buttons 1 - 6 (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject.
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to Hands Free Phone section of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s
Manual.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
176
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player, Cassette, Satellite, or Vehicle Entertainment
System (VES) (if equipped).
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if equipped) mode.
Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left
side to seek down. The radio will remained tuned to the
new station until you make another selection. Holding
the button and will bypass stations without stopping
until you release it.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds (satellite
scan 8 seconds) at each listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press SCAN a second
time.
Time Button
Press the time button and the time of day will be
displayed for 5 seconds.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune /
Audio control.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side Tune
/ Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune / Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
INFO Button (Radio Mode)
Press the INFO button for an RBDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast (if available) from an FM station (FM
mode only).
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control to increase or decrease
the frequency.
177
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
178
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone,
balance and fade.
RND/PTY Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time
out the PTY icon will turn off. Turning the tune knob
within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to
be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast PTY information.
Turn the tune knob to select the following format types:
Program Type
No program type or
undefined
News
Information
Sports
Talk
Rock
Classic Rock
Adult Hits
16 Digit-Character
Display
None
News
Information
Sports
Talk
Rock
Classic_Rock
Adult_Hits
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Soft Rock
Top 40
Country
Oldies
Soft
Nostalgia
Jazz
Classical
Rhythm and Blues
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Foreign Language
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Personality
Public
College
Unassigned
Weather
Soft_Rock
Top_40
Country
Oldies
Soft
Nostalgia
Jazz
Classical
Rhythm_and_Blues
Soft_R_&_B
Foreign_Language
Religious_Music
Religious_Talk
Personality
Public
College
Weather
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
NOTE: If you have selected a PTY with the tune knob,
simply pressing the tune button in will go directly to a
“PTY seek”.
Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
Operating Instructions — Tape Player
Insert the cassette with the exposed tape side toward the
left and the mechanical action of the player will gently
pull the cassette into the play position.
NOTE: When subjected to extremely cold temperatures,
the tape mechanism may require a few minutes to warm
up for proper operation. Sometimes poor playback may
179
be experienced due to a defective cassette tape. Clean and
demagnetize the tape heads at least twice a year.
Seek Button
Press the SEEK button up for the next selection on the
tape and down to return to the beginning of the current
selection.
Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track
number to skip forward or backward 1 to 6 selections.
Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection, twice to
move 2 selections, etc.
Fast Forward (FF)
Press the FF button up momentarily to advance the tape
in the direction that it is playing. The tape will advance
until the button is pressed again or the end of the tape is
reached. At the end of the tape, the tape will play in the
opposite direction.
Rewind (RW)
Press the RW button momentarily to reverse the tape
direction. The tape will reverse until the button is pressed
again or until the end of the tape is reached. At the end of
the tape, the tape will play in the opposite direction.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
180
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tape Eject
Press this button and the cassette will disengage and eject from the radio.
Scan Button
Press this button to play 10 seconds of each selection.
Press the scan button a second time to cancel the feature.
Changing Tape Direction
If you wish to change the direction of tape travel (side
being played), press Preset 6. The lighted arrow in the
display window will show the new direction.
Metal Tape Selection
If a standard metal tape is inserted into the player, the
player will automatically select the correct equalization.
Pinch Roller Release
If ignition power or the radio ON/OFF switch are turned
off, the pinch roller will automatically retract to protect
the tape from any damage. When power is restored to the
tape player, the pinch roller will automatically reengage
and the tape will resume play.
Noise Reduction
The Dolby Noise Reduction System* is on whenever the
tape player is on, but may be switched off.
To turn off the Dolby Noise reduction System: Press
Preset 1 after you insert the tape. The NR light in the
display will go off when the Dolby System is off.
* ”Dolby” noise reduction manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Operation Instructions - (CD MODE For CD Audio
Play)
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
NOTE: Note: This Radio is capable of playing compact
discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable
compact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks
and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks
and WMA.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
181
SCAN Button (CD MODE For CD Audio Play)
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
You may eject a disc with the radio OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
SEEK Button (CD MODE For CD Audio Play)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next
selection on the CD. Press the left side of the button to
return to the beginning of the current selection, or return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is
within the first 5 seconds of the current selection.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode For CD Audio
Play)
LOAD/ EJECT - Load
Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays 9INSERT DISC9 insert the
CD into the player.
Radio display will show 9LOADING DISC9 when the disc
is loading, and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
LOAD / EJT - Eject
Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
182
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio display will show 9EJECTING DISC9 when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the LOAD/ EJT button for 5 seconds and
all CDs will be ejected from the radio.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
9INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes the radio
will go to the previous tuner mode.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
TIME Button (CD MODE For CD Audio Play)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE For CD Audio Play)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
TUNE Control (CD MODE For CD Audio Play)
Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone,
Fade, and Balance. See Radio Mode.
AM/FM Button (CD MODE For CD Audio Play)
Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.
RND/PTY Button (Random Play Button) (CD
MODE For CD Audio Play)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
NOTE: MP3 and WMA Random Play are for file folders
only.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
BUTTONS 1 - 6 (CD MODE For CD Audio Play)
Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject.
183
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of directory levels: 15
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders: 100
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files, however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator 9.9 and a
3-character extension)
Supported media (disc types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as 9keep disc open after
writing9 are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported medium formats (file systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator 9.9 and a
3-character extension)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
184
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported MP3 file formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
Bit rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 and WMA files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 and WMA files may
be affected by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For MP3 and
WMA Audio Play)
SEEK Button (CD Mode For MP3 and WMA Play)
Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next
file. Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays the
beginning of the file. Pressing the button within the first
ten seconds plays the previous file.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode For MP3 and
WMA Play)
LOAD/ EJT - Load
Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays 9INSERT DISC9 insert the
CD into the player.
185
The radio display will show 9LOADING DISC9 when the
disc is loading.
LOAD / EJT - Eject
Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
Radio display will show 9EJECTING DISC9 when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
9INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes the radio
will go to the previous tuner mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
186
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INFO Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Press and INFO button while playing MP3 or WMA disc.
The radio scrolls through the following TAG information:
Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to 9elapsed
time9 priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button while in the message
display priority mode or elapsed time display priority
mode will display the song title for each file.
RW/FF (CD Mode For MP3 and WMA Play)
Press the FF side of the button to move forward through
the file or MP3 and WMA selection.
TUNE Control (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of
Tone, Balance, and Fade.
AM/FM Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Switches back to Radio mode.
RND/ PTY Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Pressing this button plays files randomly.
SET/DIR Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Press the SET/DIR Button to display folders, when
playing an MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure.
Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or
move through available folders. Press the TUNE control
to select a folder.
Buttons 1 - 6 (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject.
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (if
equipped)
Refer to Hands Free Phone section of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (if
equipped)
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s
Manual.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES) (if equipped)
Refer to separate Video Entertainment System (VES)
Guide.
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED
Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satellite Radio. This service offers up to 100 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
System Activation
To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service, call the
toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site
at www.sirius.com. Please have the following information available when activating your system:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Credit card information.
3. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
187
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ENS/SID)
The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio
system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following
steps:
ESN/SID Access With REF Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and Time buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. The first four digits of the
twelve-digit ESN/SID number will be displayed. Press
the SEEK UP button to display the next four digits.
Continue to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve
ESN/SID digits have been displayed. The SEEK DOWN
will page down until the first four digits are displayed.
The radio will exit the ESN/SID mode when any other
button is pushed, the ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes
has passed since any button was pushed.
ESN/SID Access With RAQ and RAK Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
188
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/SID numbers will be displayed. The radio will exit the ESN/SID
mode when any other button is pushed, the ignition is
turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button
was pushed.
Selecting Satellite Mode in REF, RAQ, and RAK
Radios
Selecting Satellite Mode — REF Radio
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word 9SAT9
appears in the display.
A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Selecting Satellite Mode — RAQ and RAK Radio
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word 9SAT9
appears in the display.
These radios will also display the current station name
and program type. For more information such as song
title and artist press the MSG or INFO button.
A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the
Satellite radio mode.
Selecting a Channel
Press and release the SEEK or TUNE knob to search for
the next channel. Press the top of the button to search up
and the bottom of the button to search down. Holding the
TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until
the button is released.
Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to
automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The
radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before
moving on to the next channel. The word 9SCAN9 will
appear in the display between each channel change. Press
the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.
NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable content
can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888-5397474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblocking. Please have your ESN/SID information available.
Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels
In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM pre-set stations, you
may also commit 12 satellite stations to push button
memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not
erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the
memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Using the PTY (Program Type) Button (if
equipped)
Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your
radio.
PTY Button (SCAN(
When the desired program type is obtained, press the
9SCAN9 button within five seconds. The radio will play 7
seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next
channel of the selected program type. Press the 9SCAN9
button a second time to stop the search.
NOTE: Pressing the 9SEEK9 or 9SCAN9 button while
performing a music type scan will change the channel by
one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory
button during a music type scan, will call up the memory
channel and stop the search.
PTY Button (SEEK(
When the desired program is obtained, press the 9SEEK9
button within five seconds. The channel will change to
the next channel that matches the program type selected.
189
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items should be
placed as far forward as possible. Do not place items
directly on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons.
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
190
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the
surface of the steering wheel at the 3 and 9 o’clock
positions.
number, tape, or one of 200 Satellite radio channels
depending on which radio is in the vehicle.
The VOLUME switch controls the volume of
the sound system. Pressing the top of the
rocker switch will increase the volume and
pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will
decrease the volume.
The AUDIO MODE SELECT button changes
the mode of the radio from AM to FM to Tape
to CD, or to Satellite (SAT) depending on
which radio is in the vehicle.
Some models feature an Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) with driver-interactive display. This is
located in the upper part of the instrument cluster
between the speedometer and tachometer. The audio
mode of the EVIC can display any one of twelve radio
station preset frequencies, CD disc number, CD track
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
The FUNCTION SELECT button advances the
radio to the next preset, changes the tape side
being played, or changes the current disc when
used in audio mode.
The SCROLL buttons change selections such as
radio station, CD track, or satellite radio channel depending on the current mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The following describes the operation of the SCROLL
buttons in each mode:
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
Tape Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
selection on the cassette. Pressing the bottom of the
switch once will go to the beginning of the current
selection or to the beginning of the previous selection if it
is within the first 5 seconds of the current selection.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second selection, three times, it will play the third, etc.
Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to switch the side
of the tape to be played.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
191
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
Satellite
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable satellite channel and pressing the bottom of the
switch will SEEK down for the next listenable satellite
channel.
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Broadcast Signals
Your new radio will provide excellent reception under
most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car
radios have performance limitations, due to mobile operation and natural phenomena, which might lead you to
believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help
you understand and save you concern about these “apparent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or
two about the transmission and reception of radio signals.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
192
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Two Types of Signals
There are two basic types of radio signals... AM or
Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound
causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to
vary... and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the
frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.
Electrical Disturbances
Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They
interfere very little with the frequency variations that
carry the FM signal.
NOTE: On vehicles so equipped the radio, steering
wheel radio controls and 6 disc CD/DVD changer if
equipped, will remain active for 10 minutes after the
ignition has been turned off, and the driver door has not
been opened. This feature is programmable through the
electronic vehicle information center (EVIC) — if
equipped. Refer to “Delay Power Off to Accessories Until
Exit” under “Personal Settings” in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center section for details.
CASSETTE TAPE AND PLAYER MAINTENANCE
To keep the cassette tapes and player in good condition,
take the following precautions:
AM Reception
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception
can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines
and neon signs.
1. Do not use cassette tapes longer than C-90; otherwise,
sound quality and tape durability will be greatly diminished.
FM Reception
Because FM transmission is based on frequency variations, interference that consists of amplitude variations
can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,
which is the major feature of FM radio.
3. Keep the cassette tape away from direct sunlight, heat
and magnetic fields such as the radio speakers.
2. Keep the cassette tape in its case to protect from
slackness and dust when it is not in use.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Before inserting a tape, make sure that the label is
adhering flatly to the cassette.
5. A loose tape should be corrected before use. To rewind
a loose tape, insert the eraser end of a pencil into the tape
drive gear and twist the pencil in the required directions.
193
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep the CD/DVD discs in good condition, take the
following precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
Maintain your cassette tape player. The head and capstan
shaft in the cassette player can pick up dirt or tape
deposits each time a cassette is played. The result of
deposits on the capstan shaft may cause the tape to wrap
around and become lodged in the tape transport. The
other adverse condition is low or “muddy” sound from
one or both channels, as if the treble tone control were
turned all the way down. To prevent this, you should
periodically clean the head with a commercially available
WET cleaning cassette.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
As preventive maintenance, clean the head about every
30 hours of use. If you wait until the head becomes very
dirty (noticeably poor sound), it may not be possible to
remove all deposits with a simple WET cleaning cassette.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the
disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
194
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being On in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
The instrument panel features four dual-vane airflow
registers. Two registers are located on the outer ends of
the instrument panel and two are located in the center of
the instrument panel. These registers can be closed to
partially block airflow.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
CLIMATE CONTROLS — Manual
Air Conditioning
The controls for the heating/air conditioning and ventilation system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary
knobs. These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired
interior conditions.
Press this button to turn on and off the air conditioning. Cool dehumidified air comes through the
outlets selected by the mode selector. Press the button a
second time to turn off the air conditioning. The button
includes an LED that illuminates when compressor operation is selected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electric Rear Window Defroster
Press this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated side mirrors (if
equipped). An LED in the button will illuminate to
indicate the rear window defroster is ON. The defroster
automatically turns off after about 10 minutes of operation.
CAUTION!
To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the
rear window defroster, do not use scrapers, sharp
instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window.
Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm
water.
195
Blower Control
The rotary knob on the left controls the
blower and can be set in one of four
speeds and OFF. The blower fan motor will remain on until the system is
turned to the OFF position or the
ignition is turned OFF.
Temperature Control
The temperature of air can be selected
by rotating the temperature control
knob in the center. The coldest temperature setting is on the extreme left
and the warmest setting on the extreme right of the rotation. The knob
can be positioned at any point on the
dial.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
196
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Floor
Mode Selection
The mode selector (the right rotary
knob) can be placed in several positions. Dots between each of the mode
selections identify intermediate modes
that allow the occupants to fine tune
airflow distribution.
Defrost
Air is directed to the windshield through the
outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is also
directed to the front door windows through the side
window demister grilles.
NOTE: To improve fuel economy, leave in defrost only
when necessary.
Defrost/Floor
Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets
and the outlets at the base of the windshield. Air
is also directed to the front door windows
through the side window demister grilles.
Air flows through the floor outlets located under
the instrument panel and into the rear seating
area through vents under the front seats.
Bi-Level
Air flows both through the outlets located in the
instrument panel and those located on the floor.
Air flows through the registers in the back of the
center console to the rear seat passengers. These
registers can be closed to partially block airflow.
Panel
Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel. Air flows through the registers in the
back of the center console to the rear seat passengers.
These registers can be closed to block airflow.
Recirculation
The recirculation feature can be selected with
the mode control knob. You may choose
between Bi-Level Recirculation and Panel
Recirculation air outlets while in this mode.
Normally, air enters from outside the vehicle. However, when in Recirculation mode air inside the vehicle
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
is re-used. Use this mode to rapidly cool the inside of
the vehicle. The Recirculation mode can also be used
to temporarily block out outside odors, smoke, and
dust.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
197
outside temperature, and engine cooling temperature.
The infrared sensor independently measures the surface
temperature of the driver and passenger. Based on the
sensor input, the system automatically adjusts the air
flow temperature, the air flow volume, and amount of
outside air recirculation. This maintains a comfortable
temperature even under changing conditions.
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
long periods as fogging may occur.
Automatic Temperature Control — If Equipped
The Infrared Dual-Zone Climate Control System automatically maintains the interior comfort level desired by
the driver and passenger. This is accomplished by a dual
sun-sensor in the top of the instrument panel, and an
infrared sensor located in the face of the control unit.
There are also various sensors monitored by this system
which take account for vehicle speed, A/C pressure,
Operation of the system is quite simple. Begin by turning
the right mode knob to AUTO, and place the blower
control (left knob) to either LO AUTO or HI AUTO. The
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
198
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LO AUTO position should be used for front seat occupants only. The HI AUTO position should be used when
more air flow is desired, or when rear seat occupants are
present. Dial in the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by rotating the driver’s or passenger’s
control knob. Once the comfort level is selected the
system will maintain that level automatically using the
heating system. Should the desired comfort level require
air conditioning, the system will automatically make the
adjustment.
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
the OFF position on the fan control stops the system
completely and closes the outside air intake.
72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum
comfort for the average person, however, this may vary.
The air conditioning in this system is automatic.
Pressing this button while in AUTO mode will
cause an audible beep and the LED will flash three
times and remain off. This indicates that the system is in
AUTO and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary.
The system will automatically control recirculation. However, pressing this button will temporarily put the system in recirculation mode
(ten minutes). This can be used when outside
conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity
are present. This will cause an audible beep, and the LED
will illuminate. After ten minutes the system will return
to normal AUTO mode function and the LED will turn
off.
NOTE: The temperature setting can be adjusted at any
time without affecting automatic control operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• The surface of the climate control panel, and the top
center of the instrument panel should be kept free of
debris due to the climate control sensor’s location.
Mud on the windshield may also cause poor operation
of this system.
• To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will
remain off until the engine warms up. However, the
fan will engage immediately if the defrost mode is
selected or if you manually select a blower speed.
199
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic. This means the customer can override
the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
range used when the AUTO setting is not desired. The
left control can be set to any fixed blower speed by
rotating the knob.
NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
Operation Chart below for details.
• Under certain conditions (after the vehicle is turned
off) the climate control system may recalibrate and a
noise may be heard for 20 seconds. This is part of
normal operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
200
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
201
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting and
select the direction of the air by rotating the right mode
knob to one of the following positions.
floor. Air flows through the registers in the back of
the center console to the rear seat passengers. These
registers can be closed to block airflow.
• Defrost
Air is directed to the windshield through the
outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is
also directed to the front door windows through the
side window demister grilles.
• Panel
Air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel. Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat
passengers. These registers can be closed to block
airflow.
• Defrost/Floor
Air flows through the front and rear floor
outlets and the outlets at the base of the
windshield. Air is also directed to the front
door windows through the side window demister
grilles.
• Floor
Air flows through the floor outlets located
under the instrument panel and into the rear
seating area through vents under the front seats.
• Bi-Level
Air flows both through the outlets located in
the instrument panel and those located on the
Depress this button to turn on and off the air
conditioning during manual operation only. Conditioned outside air is then directed through the
outlets selected on the mode control dial. The button
includes an LED that illuminates when manual operation
is selected, and will cause an audible beep.
NOTE: To manually control the air conditioning the
mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position.
Press this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated side mirrors (if
equipped). An LED in the button will illuminate and an
audible beep indicates that the rear window defroster is
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
202
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ON. The defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes of operation for the first push of the
button, and will turn off after approximately 5 minutes
for the second push of the button.
CAUTION!
To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the
rear window defroster, do not use scrapers, sharp
instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window.
Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm
water.
This button can be used to block out smoke,
odors, dust, high humidity, or if rapid cooling
is desired. The recirculation mode should only
be used temporarily. The button includes an
LED that illuminates, and an audible beep indicates that
the recirculation mode is active. You may use this feature
separately.
NOTE: Extended use of recirculation may cause the
windows to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to
fog, press the “Recirculate” icon button to return to
outside air. Some temp./humidity conditions will cause
captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow
“Recirculate” to be selected while in the defrost or
defrost/floor modes. Attempting to use the recirculation
while in these modes will cause the LED in the button to
blink and then turn off.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A 50% solution of ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended. Refer
to section 7, Maintenance Procedures, of this manual for
proper coolant selection.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
NOTE: See Operating Tips chart (for Manual A/C
Control) at the end of this section for suggested control
settings in different weather conditions.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh
air and high blower setting. This will insure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
203
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
long periods as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they
enter the plenum they could plug the water drains. In
winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush and snow.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
your Owner’s Manual for filter replacement instructions.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
4
204
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
m Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
m Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
m Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 209
m Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
m Transmission Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
▫ 4 Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 209
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . 231
▫ 5 Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 214
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 232
▫ Automatic Transmission — General
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
m Tires—General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
m AutoStick — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ AutoStick Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
m Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
m Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 239
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
5
206
STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
▫ Sulfur In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
▫ Alignment And Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
m Self–Sealing Tires—If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
m Tire Pressure Monitor System — If Equipped . . 243
m Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
▫ Tire Pressure Monitoring — Base System . . . . . 243
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
▫ Tire Pressure Monitoring —
Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
m Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . . 257
m Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . . 257
m Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
m Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 249
m Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
m Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
▫ Warranty Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
m Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
CAUTION!
Long periods of engine idling, especially at high
engine speeds, can cause excessive exhaust temperatures which can damage your vehicle. Do not leave
your vehicle unattended with the engine running.
WARNING!
Do not leave animals or children inside parked
vehicles in hot weather; interior heat build up may
cause serious injury or death.
207
Normal Starting
Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator
pedal. Turn the key to the “START” position and release
when the engine starts. If the engine has not started
within 3 seconds, slightly depress the accelerator pedal
while continuing to crank. If the engine fails to start
within 15 seconds, turn the key to the “OFF” position,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the normal starting
procedure.
Extremely Cold Weather (below 220°F or 229°C) To
insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your dealer) is recommended.
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
208
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and
once the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly. See section 6 of
this manual for the proper jump starting procedures and follow them carefully.
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
If Engine Fails to Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“NORMAL STARTING” procedure, it may be flooded.
Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it there while cranking the engine. This should clear
any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking up to 15
seconds with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to
the floor. Release the accelerator pedal and the key once
the engine is running smoothly. Do not overspeed engine.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the “NORMAL STARTING” procedure
should be repeated.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
209
TRANSMISSION SHIFTING
4 Speed Automatic Transmission
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord
to a standard 110-115 volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
5
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
Module.
WARNING!
Gear Selector
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 volt electrical cord could
cause electrocution.
Shifting from D (Drive) to P (Park) or R (Reverse) (or
from P or R to D) should be done only after the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the
shift lever between these gears.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
210
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or
“N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always
shift the vehicle into P (Park), remove the key from
the ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once the
key is removed from the ignition, the transmission
shift lever is locked in the P (Park) position, securing
the vehicle against unwanted movement. Furthermore, you should never leave children unattended
inside a vehicle.
Gear Ranges
P (Park)
Supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never
use P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the
parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
Always apply the parking brake first, and then place
the selector in P (Park) position.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission shift lever into the P
(Park) position:
• When shifting into P (Park) move the lever all the way
forward until it stops, and is fully seated.
• Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument
panel to ensure it is in the P (Park) position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Before moving the shift lever out of P (Park), you
must turn the ignition from LOCK to ON so the shift
lever is released. Otherwise, damage to the shifter
could result.
R (Reverse)
For moving the vehicle rearward. Always stop before
moving the lever to R (Reverse), except when rocking
the vehicle.
N (Neutral)
Engine may be started in this range.
WARNING!
Do not coast in N (Neutral) and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle.
211
D (Overdrive)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides smoothest up shifts and down
shifts and best fuel economy. Select the “3” range
when frequent transmission shifting occurs when using the Overdrive range, such as when operating the
vehicle under heavy loading conditions (in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing heavy trailers.
NOTE: If the vehicle is started in cold outside temperatures, shifts into Overdrive may be delayed. Normal
Overdrive and shifting operation will resume when the
temperature of the transmission reaches the appropriate
temperature. Refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” later in this section.
If the transmission temperature gets too hot, the
transmission may downshift out of Overdrive or engage overdrive at higher vehicle speeds until the
transmission cools down. After cooldown, Overdrive
will resume normal operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
212
STARTING AND OPERATING
3 (Third)
This range eliminates shifts into Overdrive. The transmission will operate normally in First, Second and
Third while in this range. The “3” position should also
be used when descending steep grades to prevent
brake system distress.
CAUTION!
• Never race the engine with the brakes on and the
vehicle in gear, and never hold the vehicle on an
incline without applying the brakes. These practices can cause overheating and damage to the
transmission.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between “First” and R (Reverse), do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up.
L (Low)
This range should be used for engine braking when
descending very steep grades. In this range, upshifts
will occur only to prevent engine overspeed while
downshifts occur earlier than other gear range selections.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle. A
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in high
gear. When the vehicle speed drops or during acceleration, the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• The torque converter clutch will not engage until the
transmission fluid and engine coolant is warm (usually after 1–3 miles (1.6–4.8 km) of driving). Because
engine speed is higher when the torque converter
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into “Overdrive” when cold. This is
considered a normal condition. Pulling the shift lever
into the “3” position will show that the transmission is
able to shift into and out of “Overdrive.”
• If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the
first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
transmission fluid partially draining from the torque
converter into the transmission. This is considered a
normal condition and will not cause damage to the
transmission. The torque converter will refill within 5
seconds of shifting from P (Park) into any other gear
position.
213
Transmission Limp Home Mode
The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions.
If a condition is detected that could cause damage, the
transmission automatically shifts into second gear. The
transmission remains in second gear despite the forward
gear selected. Park (P), Reverse (R), and Neutral (N) will
continue to operate. This Reset feature allows the vehicle
to be driven to a dealer for service without damaging the
transmission.
If the problem has been momentary, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears.
• Stop the vehicle and shift into PARK (P).
• Turn the key to LOCK then start the engine.
• Shift into “D” and resume driving.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit a dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, dealer service is
required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
214
STARTING AND OPERATING
5 Speed Automatic Transmission
WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle you should shift
the transmission into Park, remove the key from the
ignition, and apply the park brake. Once the key is
removed from the ignition the transmission shift
lever is locked in the Park position, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement. Furthermore,
you should never leave children unattended inside a
vehicle. The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have engaged the transmission shift
lever into the “Park” position:
• When shifting into Park move the lever all the
way forward until it stops, and is fully seated.
Gear Selector
• Look at the shift indicator window on the console
to ensure it is in the “P” position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
Park Position
The PARK position is to be used when parking the
vehicle. Engage only with the vehicle stopped. The PARK
position is not intended to serve as a brake when the
vehicle is parked. Rather, the driver should always use
the parking brake in addition to placing the selector lever
in PARK to secure the vehicle.
215
ON positions. Remove the rubber storage tray from the
bin located to the right of the shifter lever. The override
can be activated by pressing the pink-colored tab, which
can be accessed through a hole inside the bin. While the
override is pressed, the shifter can be moved out of the
park position without pressing the brake. After operation
return rubber storage tray to its original position.
PARK supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion.
5
NOTE:
• If the key is in the ACC or ON position, you must press
the brake pedal to shift out of the PARK position.
• The key can be removed from the ignition switch only
with the selector lever in the PARK position. With the
key removed, the selector lever is locked in the PARK
position.
For electrical system malfunctions there is an override for
the interlock system. In order to override this system the
key must be in the ignition with the switch in the ACC or
Brake Interlock Override
Reverse
Shift into REVERSE gear only when the vehicle is completely stopped.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
216
STARTING AND OPERATING
Neutral
No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive
axle. When the brakes are released, the vehicle can be
moved freely (pushed or towed). Do not engage in
NEUTRAL position while driving except to coast when
the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g., on icy roads).
The engine may be started in this range. Use this range
for starting your vehicle if it is moving or being towed.
CAUTION!
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other reason
with selector lever in NEUTRAL can result in transmission damage that is not covered by the Limited
Warranty.
Drive
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts and best fuel economy.
The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs when using
the Overdrive range, such as when operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions (in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing heavy
trailers, use the AutoStick mode and select the “3” range.
AutoStickt Gear selection
The transmission gear can be selected by pressing the
selector lever to the right or the left with the selector lever
in the DRIVE position. The gear currently selected is
indicated in the instrument cluster display. Briefly press
selector lever in the “D -” direction. The transmission will
shift from the current gear to the next lower gear. Shifting
into another gear that allows for quicker acceleration or
to slow the vehicle down is possible. Downshifts can also
be performed.
Press and hold the selector lever in the “D-” direction.
The transmission will shift from the current gear directly
to the best gear for acceleration.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: To avoid overrevving the engine when the
selector lever is moved in “D -” direction, the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s revolutions per minute limit would be exceeded.
Briefly press the selector lever in the “D +” direction. The
transmission will shift from the current gear to the next
higher gear.
Press and hold the selector lever in the “D +” direction.
The transmission will shift from the current gear directly
to gear “D”.
WARNING!
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order
to obtain braking action. This could result in drive
wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.
You could lose control of your vehicle and have an
accident.
217
Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures
During cold temperature operation you may notice delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency.
Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode
The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions.
If a condition is detected that could result in transmission
damage, the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode.
If vehicle acceleration worsens, or the transmission no
longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in
the Limp Home Mode. In this mode, the transmission
will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is
brought to a stop. After the vehicle has stopped,
PARK(P), REVERSE(R), and NEUTRAL(N) will continue
to operate. SECOND gear will operate in the DRIVE(D)
shifter position. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp may be
illuminated.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
218
STARTING AND OPERATING
A reset feature is available to allow the vehicle to be
driven to a dealer for service. To reset the transmission,
use the following procedure:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Move the selector lever to the PARK position.
3. Turn off the engine.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Move the shift lever to the desired range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the transmission will
return to normal operation.
Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
If the problem has been momentary, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears.
Permanent Transmission Limp Home Mode
Permanent Limp Home Mode will be activated if the
transmission enters temporary Limp Home Mode three
times. Follow the reset procedure described in the previous section. In Permanent Limp Home Mode, PARK(P),
REVERSE(R) and NEUTRAL(N) will continue to operate.
SECOND gear will operate in the DRIVE(D) shifter
position. The malfunction indicator lamp may illuminate.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit a dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic Transmission — General Information
219
The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, dependent upon:
• Altitude
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the
engine is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
• Vehicle Loading
• Driving Style
• Selector lever position
• Accelerator position
• Vehicle speed
The gear shifting process is continuously adapted, dependent on the driving style, the driving situation and
the road characteristics.
NOTE:
• After selecting any driving position, wait a moment to
allow the gear to fully engage before accelerating,
especially when the engine is cold.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
220
STARTING AND OPERATING
• If there is a need to restart your engine be sure to cycle
the key to the LOCK position before restarting. Transmission engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds
after restart if the key is not cycled to the LOCK
position first.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and when your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
• The electronically controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating. Therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the
break-in period. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles.
The selector lever is automatically locked while in the
PARK position. To move the selector lever out of the
PARK position, the brake pedal must be firmly depressed
before the shift lock will release.
Shift the selector lever to the desired position only when
the engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is
applied. Do not release the brake until ready to drive. The
vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the selector lever is in DRIVE or REVERSE position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
Stopping
For brief stops, leave the transmission in gear and hold
the vehicle with the brake pedal. For longer stops with
the engine idling, shift into the NEUTRAL or PARK
position and hold the vehicle with the parking brake.
When stopping the vehicle uphill, do not hold it with the
accelerator; use the brake. This avoids unnecessary transmission heat build-up.
Maneuvering
To maneuver in tight areas, control the vehicle speed by
gradually releasing the brakes. Accelerate gently and
never abruptly step on the accelerator.
To rock a vehicle out of soft ground (mud or snow),
alternately shift from forward to reverse, while applying
only slight acceleration. Rocking a vehicle free in this
manner may cause the ABS or traction system malfunction indicator light to come on. Turn off the engine and
restart the engine to clear the malfunction indication.
221
Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a brake transmission shift
interlock system (BTSI) that holds the gearshift lever in
the P (Park) position when the ignition switch is in the
LOCK position. To move the gear selector lever out of the
P (Park) position, the ignition switch must be turned to
the ON position, and the brake pedal must be depressed.
Over Temperature Mode
The transmission electronics constantly monitor the
transmission oil temperature. If the transmission exceeds
normal operating temperature, the transmission will
change the way it shifts to help control the condition.
This may result in a slightly different feeling or response
during normal operation in D (Drive) position. After the
transmission cools down, it will return to normal operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
222
STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOSTICK — If Equipped
Autostick is a driver-interactive transmission that offers
manual gear shifting capability to provide you with more
control. Autostick allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and
improve overall vehicle performance. This system can
also provide you with more control during passing, city
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
Autostick Operation
By placing the shift lever in the DRIVE position it can be
moved from side to side. This allows the driver to select
a higher or lower range of gear ratios. Moving the lever
to the left (-) triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an
upshift. The gear position will be shown in the transmission gear display, located in the instrument cluster.
You can shift in or out of the autostick mode at any time
without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal. If you
choose the Overdrive mode, the transmission will operate automatically; shifting between the five available
gears. When you wish to engage autostick, simply move
the shift lever to the Right or Left (D+/D-) position while
in DRIVE. The transmission will remain in the current
gear until an upshift or downshift is chosen.
PARKING BRAKE
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch on, the brake light in the instrument cluster will
turn on.
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
223
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the
Park position.
5
Parking Brake Release
Parking Brake
To release the parking brake, pull out on the parking
brake release located on the left side of the instrument
panel.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the gear selector in Park, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the selector out of park. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb
on a downhill grade and away from the curb on a uphill
grade.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
224
STARTING AND OPERATING
The parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be injured. Children should be warned not
to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector lever. Don’t leave the keys in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving: failure to do so can lead to brake
failure, and an accident.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
off), the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems lose normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. There will be some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident
by increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the Brake Warning Lamp.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
Anti-Lock Brake System
The Anti-Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle
stability and brake performance under most braking
conditions. The system automatically “pumps” the
brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up.
WARNING!
• Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
The electronic brake force distribution (EBD) prevents the
rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater
control of available braking forces applied to the rear
axle.
WARNING!
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
225
The ABS light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The light will come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and may stay
on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
226
STARTING AND OPERATING
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not come on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
bulb repaired as soon as possible.
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light
remain on, the Anti-Lock brakes (ABS) and Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into Anti-lock:
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
• the clicking sound of solenoid valves,
• brake pedal pulsations,
• and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the
end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system performing its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system
is working properly. This self check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated
electronic equipment that may be susceptible to
interference caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
STARTING AND OPERATING
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason, the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and does not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
227
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolong operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
5
228
STARTING AND OPERATING
• European Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter 9P9 is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
• LT(Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
NOTE:
• P(Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
229
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
(....blank....( = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
215 = Section Width in Milimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
R = Construction Code
—9R9 means Radial Construction.
—9D9 means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
230
STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions.
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions. (ie. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions and
posted speed limits).
Load Identification:
(....blank....( = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire
however the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including
date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
231
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side
of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use.
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location.(2 digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size.(2 digits)
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer.(1 to 4 digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured.(2 digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured.(2 digits)
—01 means the year 2001.
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
232
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: Some vehicles have a “Tire and Loading Information” placard located on the driver’s side “B” pillar.
This placard tells you important information about
the,
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear
and spare tires.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and the Vehicle Loading section of
this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWR’s, vehicle loading and trailer towing, see the
Vehicle Loading section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
233
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on
your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (1400–750 (5 x 150) =
650 lb.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in step 4.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
234
STARTING AND OPERATING
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and
number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the
seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: For the following example the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392
Kg).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
235
5
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
236
STARTING AND OPERATING
1. Safety—
WARNING!
Overloading of your tire is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES—GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
• Under inflation increases tire flexing and can
result in tire failure.
• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause
damage that results in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
237
2. Economy—
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Underinflation also increases tire
rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure for passenger cars
is listed on either the face of the driver’s door or the
driver’s side “B” pillar. For vehicles other than passenger
cars, the cold tire inflation pressures are listed on either
the “B” pillar, the Certification Label or in the Tire
Inflation Pressures brochure in the glove compartment.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
5
“B” PILLAR
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are underinflated.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
238
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap–if equipped. This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1mile
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side wall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
239
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled at the first opportunity.
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use
only. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited
tread life. When two or more tread wear indicators
appear in adjacent grooves, the temporary use spare
tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the
warnings which apply to your spare. Failure to do so
could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle
control.
5
240
STARTING AND OPERATING
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
See the paragraph on Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section
6 of this manual.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck. And
don’t let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
241
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (see the paragraph on tread
wear indicators). Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire. The
service description and load identification will be found
on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you
contact your original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the indicators appear
in 2 or more adjacent grooves, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
242
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause
unpredictable handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose control
and have an accident resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
Alignment And Balance
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
• Fast tire wear.
• Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear.
• Vehicle pull to right or left.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer
for proper diagnosis.
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-ofbalance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
SELF–SEALING TIRES—IF EQUIPPED
A non-hardening viscous sealant applied to the inner
liner of each tire fills punctures up to 0.19 in. (5 mm) to
minimize the loss of air pressure. This contributes to the
safety of the vehicle by significantly reducing the probability of a roadside stop due to a flat tire.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING — BASE SYSTEM
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPM) system uses
wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic
sensors to monitor tire pressure levels (EXCLUDING
THE SPARE TIRE). Sensors, mounted to each wheel as
part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to
the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
243
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Lamp will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be activated when one or more
tire pressures is low. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Lamp will flash on and off for ten seconds when a
system fault is detected. The flash cycle will repeat every
ten minutes or until the fault condition is removed and
reset.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System consists of the
following components:
• Receiver Module
• 4/5 Wheel Sensors
• Amber Colored Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator
Lamp
The system will consist of tire pressure monitoring
sensors attached to each wheel through the valve stem
mounting hole, a central receiver module and an amber
colored Indicator Lamp. A sensor is located in the spare
wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size
spare wheel and tire assembly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
244
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: For vehicles with optional wheel/tire sizes and
significantly different tire placard pressures, the placard
pressure value and the low-pressure threshold value is
re-programmable at your authorized dealer to accommodate the customer selected wheel/tire combinations recommended by DaimlerChrysler.
CAUTION!
The TPM system has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPM system pressures
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or
style. After-market wheels can cause sensor damage.
Do not use tire sealant from a can, or balance beads
if your vehicle is equipped with a TPM system, as
damage to the sensors may result.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the wheel rim sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPM system can inform the driver of a low tire
pressure condition.
• The TPM system is not intended to replace normal tire
care and maintenance, nor to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPM system should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING — PREMIUM
SYSTEM
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPM) system uses
wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic
sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted
to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire
pressure readings to the Receiver Module. The wheel
sensors monitor tire pressure, and status for all four
active road tires and the spare tire. The spare tire pressure
is monitored, but not displayed.
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Lamp will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be activated when one or more
tire pressures is low. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Lamp will flash on and off for ten seconds when a
system fault is detected. The flash cycle will repeat every
ten minutes or until the fault condition is removed and
reset.
245
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System consists of the
following components:
• Receiver Module
• 4/5 Wheel Sensors
• 4 Wheel Sensor Trigger Modules
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display Messages in
the EVIC
• Amber Colored Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator
Lamp
The system consists of tire pressure monitoring sensors
attached to each wheel through the valve stem mounting
hole, a central receiver module, Wheel Sensor Trigger
Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells,
various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display Messages in the EVIC, and an amber colored Indicator Lamp.
A sensor shall be installed in the spare wheel if the
vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel
and tire assembly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
246
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: For vehicles with optional wheel/tire sizes and
significantly different tire placard pressures, the placard
pressure value and the low-pressure threshold value is
re-programmable at your authorized dealer to accommodate the customer selected wheel/tire combinations recommended by DaimlerChrysler.
The following 9warnings9 will cause a text message to be
displayed, an audible chime to sound and the tire pressure Indicator Lamp to illuminate. The audible chime
will occur once every ignition cycle for each 9warning9
detected. The tire pressure Indicator Lamp will illuminate continuously (solid) and shall remain illuminated
until the warning condition is removed/reset.
NOTE: The Indicator Lamp will only illuminate for the
four active road tires. A low spare tire pressure will not
cause the Indicator Lamp to illuminate
LEFT FRONT, LEFT REAR, RIGHT FRONT,
RIGHT REAR LOW PRESSURE
One or more of these messages will be displayed in the
EVIC if a low tire pressure condition exists in one or more
tires.
Inspect all tires for proper inflation pressure, once the
proper tire pressure has been set, the TPM system
warning will reset automatically when the vehicle has
been driven for at least 2 minutes at or above 15 mph (24
km/h).
CHECK TPM SYSTEM
See your authorized dealer when this message appears in
the EVIC. This message indicates that a system fault
condition has been detected.
When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following
messages.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
The TPM system has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPM system pressures
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or
style. After-market wheels can cause sensor damage.
Do not use tire sealant from a can, or balance beads
if your vehicle is equipped with a TPM system, as
damage to the sensors may result.
247
NOTE:
• The TPM system can inform the driver of a low tire
pressure condition.
• The TPM system is not intended to replace normal tire
care and maintenance, nor to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPM system should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the wheel rim sensor.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
248
STARTING AND OPERATING
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123
TIRE CHAINS
Use only compact chains, or other traction aids that meet
SAE type “Class S” specifications. Chains must be the
proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain
manufacturer.
NOTE: Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted chain clearance between tires
and other suspension components, it is important
that only chains in good condition are used. Broken
chains can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle
immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain
breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the chain
before further use.
• Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 1⁄2 mile
(0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not use on rear wheels of All Wheel Drive (AWD)
vehicles.
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions on
the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the lower suggested operating
speed of the chain manufacturer if different than the
speed recommended by the manufacture.
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: In order to avoid damage to tires, chains, and
your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period of time
on dry pavement. Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s
instructions on method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for usage.
Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both
the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacture suggest
a maximum speed. This notice applies to all chain
traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during winter. Standard tires are of the all season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire side wall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of 4, failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
249
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120
km/h).
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates, and tend to develop irregular wear patterns.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
250
STARTING AND OPERATING
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”
Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
shown in the following diagram.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Your vehicle is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline having
an octane of 87.
2.7L Engines
The manufacturer recommends the use of
89 octane for optimum performance. The
use of premium gasoline is not recommended.
3.5L and
5.7L Engines
Continued heavy spark knock can cause engine damage
and immediate service is required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
251
Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world
have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define
fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions,
engine performance, and durability for your vehicle. The
manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet
the WWFC specifications if they are available.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
CAUTION!
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol. Use of
these blends may result in starting and driveability
problems and may damage critical fuel system components.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline
blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and
may not be covered by the vehicle warranty. While MTBE
is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it does not have
the negative effects of Methanol.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
252
STARTING AND OPERATING
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase the octane number. Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance
advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT have shown
to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends using gasolines without MMT. Since the MMT
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump,
you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not
his/her gasoline contains MMT.
vehicle may be sold nationwide. Your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting Federal specification,
but emission control system performance may be adversely affected.
Gasoline sold outside of California is permitted to have
higher sulfur levels which may affect the performance of
the vehicle’s catalytic converter. This may cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. The manufacturer recommends that you try a different brand of
unleaded gasoline having lower sulfur to determine if the
problem is fuel related prior to returning your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
higher than those allowed in the United States.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasolines.
Sulfur In Gasoline
Your vehicle may have been designed to meet California
low emission standards when using cleaner burning
California reformulated gasoline with low sulfur. This
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
CAUTION!
If the Malfunction Indicator light is flashing, immediate service is required. Refer to
the paragraph on the Onboard Diagnostics
System in section 7 of this manual.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives are not needed under
normal conditions and would result in additional cost.
Therefore you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance,
damage the emission control system, and could result
in loss of warranty coverage.
253
some light smoke, your engine may be out-of-tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as
octane enhancers are not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives are not
the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be
covered under the New Vehicle Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
• An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
5
254
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. Push in on the left side (near the
edge) of the fuel filler door to access the fuel filler cap. If
the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement
cap is for use with this vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
• Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap), and may result in a
malfunction indicator light on the instrument cluster. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the
fuel system.
255
NOTE:
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is properly
tightened. If the gas cap is not secured properly the
Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster
will turn on. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened
each time the vehicle is refueled.
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
256
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Remove the fuel tank filler tube cap (gas cap)
slowly to prevent fuel spray from the filler neck
which may cause injury.
• The volatility of some gasolines may cause a
buildup of pressure in the fuel tank that may
increase while you drive. This pressure can result
in a spray of gasoline and/or vapors when the cap
is removed from a hot vehicle. Removing the cap
slowly allows the pressure to vent and prevents
fuel spray.
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown in the
charts that follow. This information should be used for
passenger and luggage loading as indicated.
If the seatbacks are folded for carrying cargo, do not
exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR.
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the rear
of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of Vehicle
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
257
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front
and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to insure that it
is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle by axle and side by side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
258
STARTING AND OPERATING
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration. Note that
neither the GVWR or the GAWR capacities have been
exceeded.
Front
Rear Axle
Axle
Empty Weight
2054 lbs
1805 lbs
(932 kg) (819 kg )
Load (Including driver, pass271 lbs
579 lbs
sengers and cargo)
(123 kg)
(263 kg)
Total 2325 lbs
2384 lbs
(1055 kg) (1081 kg)
GAWR
2546 lbs
2708 lbs
(1155 kg) (1228 kg)
NOTE: Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label attached
to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWRs. This table is only an example.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
259
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.
Warranty Requirements
The Manufacturer’s Passenger Vehicle Warranty will
apply to vehicles used to tow trailers for non-commercial
use. However the following conditions must be met:
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
• The trailer tongue load must be considered as part of
the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to the Tire–
Safety Information Section in this manual.
Perform maintenance services as prescribed in the maintenance schedules manual. When your vehicle is used for
trailer towing, never exceed the gross axle weight rating
(GAWR) by the addition of:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• Remember that everything put in or on the trailer adds
to the load on your vehicle.
• The maximum frontal area of the trailer cannot exceed
32 square feet (2.97 square meters).
• The “D” range can be selected when towing. However,
if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the “3”
range must be selected.
NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
260
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Connecting trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic
brake lines can overload your brake system and
cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you
need them and could have an accident.
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are
recommended for motoring safety.
• The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more
than 45 minutes of continuous operation. See Schedule
“B” in section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid
change intervals.
NOTE:
• For vehicles equipped with Autostick. By using the
Autostick modes, and selecting a specific gear range,
frequent shifting can be avoided. The highest gear
range should be selected that allows for adequate
performance. For example, choose “4” if the desired
speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or “2” if needed
to maintain the desired speed.
• Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to
prevent excess heat generation. A reduction in vehicle
speed may be required to avoid extended driving at
high RPM. Return to a higher gear range or vehicle
speed when road conditions and RPM level allows.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAVEL
CONDITION
MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT(TRAILER FRONTAL AREA NOT TO
EXCEED 32 SQ. FT.)
2.7L EN3.5L EN5.7L ENGINE
GINE
GINE
UP TO 3
PERSONS
& LUGGAGE
UP TO 4
PERSONS
& LUGGAGE
UP TO 5
PERSONS
& NO LUGGAGE
1000 lbs
(454 kg)
2000 lbs
(907 kg)
261
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
2000 lbs
(907 kg)
WARNING!
1000 lbs
(454 kg)
1500 lbs
(680 kg)
1500 lbs
(680 kg)
1000 lbs
(454 kg)
1000 lbs
(454 kg)
1000 lbs
(454 kg)
A load equalizing hitch is recommended for loaded
trailer weights above 1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for
weights above 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
Connecting trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic
brake lines can overload your brake system and
cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you
need them and could have an accident.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Recreational towing on this vehicle is not recommended.
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing make sure all 4
wheels are off the ground.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
5
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
m Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
m If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
m Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
m Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
m Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
▫ With Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
▫ Jacking And Changing a Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
▫ Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
▫ Wheel Cover Installation (If Required) . . . . . . 273
m Jump-Starting Procedures If Battery Is Low . . . 273
m Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
With A Tow Dolley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
6
264
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The hazard flasher switch is located in the center of the
instrument panel between the center air outlets.
This is an emergency warning system and should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition switch is OFF.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
To engage the Hazard Warning Flashers, depress the
switch on the instrument panel. When the Hazard Warning Switch is activated, all directional turn signals will
flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the
flashers.
• On the highways — Slow down.
• In city traffic — While stopped, put transmission in
neutral, but do not increase engine idle speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, and
the fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
265
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see Section 7, Maintenance, of this
manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
service.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
6
266
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you need
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
Preparations For Jacking
• Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoid ice or
slippery areas, set the parking brake and place the
gear selector in PARK. Turn OFF the ignition.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
Hazard Warning Flasher
• Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being jacked.
• Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite the jacking position. For example, if changing
the right front tire, block the left rear wheel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
267
• Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
Jack Location
The jack is stowed under an access cover in the trunk.
Follow these steps to access the jack.
NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to
access the jack.
• Open the trunk.
• Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
6
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
268
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• Remove the spare tire.
Spare Tire Stowage
• Remove the fastener securing the jack.
The spare tire is stowed under an access cover in the
trunk. Follow these steps to access the spare tire.
• Open the trunk.
• Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
269
3. Before raising the vehicle, use lug wrench to carefully
pry off wheel cover (if equipped with steel wheels) or
center cap (if equipped with aluminum wheels).
6
Jacking and Changing a Tire
1. Block the wheel diagonally
opposite the flat tire. Passengers
should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
2. Remove the spare tire, jack and lug wrench.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with the metal
edges and retention teeth.
270
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Before raising the vehicle loosen, but do not remove,
the lug nuts of the flat tire using the lug wrench. Turn the
wheel nuts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is
still on the ground.
5. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack
saddle with the lift area of the sill flange, use the lift area
closest to the flat tire.
6. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
271
6
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
272
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
7. Remove the lug nuts, wheel cover (if equipped) and
tire. Remove the cover by hand, do not pry off.
WARNING!
8. Mount the spare tire. For vehicles equipped with
wheel covers, see the wheel cover installation instructions. Do not attempt to install a wheel cover on a
compact spare.
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
9. Tighten all the lug nuts on the mounting studs.
10. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
11. Fully tighten the lug nuts. Torque the wheel lug nuts
to 100 ft/lb. (135N. m).
12. Store the flat tire, jack and tools.
Compact Spare Tire
The compact spare tire is for temporary emergency use
with radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled at the first opportunity.
• Keep tire inflated to 60 PSI (414 KPa) Cold Inflation
Pressure.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
• Avoid driving more than 50 miles (80 km) before
replacing tire and wheel.
• This tire is designed as an emergency spare only-do
not exceed 50 MPH (80 km/h) speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
273
3. Install the cover by hand, snapping the cover over the
two lug nuts. Do not use a hammer or excessive force to
install the cover.
Wheel Cover Installation (If Required)
4. Return to Changing a Tire Section, Item #9 above.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES IF BATTERY IS
LOW
WARNING!
1. Tighten the two lug nuts on the mounting studs on
each side of the stud which is in alignment with the valve
stem.
2. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
valve stem on the wheel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is on. You can be hurt by the fan.
6
274
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from
another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous
if done improperly, so follow this procedure carefully.
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing.
Don’t lean over battery when attaching clamps or
allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes
in eyes or on skin, flush contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water.
• A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away from
the vent holes. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output that exceeds 12
volts.
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
engine compartment for jump starting.
NOTE: The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be replaced
with a battery of the same type (vented).
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact.
2. When boost is provided by a battery in another
vehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable reach and
without letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake,
place the automatic transmission in PARK and turn the
ignition switch to the OFF (or LOCK) position for both
vehicles.
3. Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical
loads.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
275
4. Connect one end of the jumper cable to the remote
jump start positive battery post (A) in the engine compartment. Connect the other end of the same cable to the
positive terminal of the booster battery. Refer to the
following illustration for jump starting connections.
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the engine ground (B)
of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure
you have a good contact on the engine ground. Refer to
the following illustration for jump starting connections.
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
Jump Starting
276
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear
(driving) wheels.
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of
the rear wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between Reverse
and Drive. Usually the least accelerator pedal pressure to
maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels is most effective.
NOTE: Turn off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
— if equipped, or Traction Control System (TCS) — if
equipped before rocking the vehicle. Refer to Electronic
Stability Program, or Traction Control System in your
Owner’s Manual for Details.
277
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck. And
don’t let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
6
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 35 mph (55 km/h).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
278
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
CAUTION!
With Ignition Key
Your vehicle may be towed under the following conditions: The gear selector must be in NEUTRAL, the
distance to be traveled must not exceed 30 miles (48 km),
and the towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48
km/h). Exceeding these towing limits may cause a transmission geartrain failure. If the transmission is not operative, or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 30 miles
(48 km), the vehicle must be transported using a flat bed
or the drive shaft disconnected at the rear axle drive
flange.
• Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front
with sling type towing equipment. Damage to the
front fascia will result.
• The only approved method of towing is with a flat
bed truck.
• Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to
the rear sheet metal, and fascia will occur.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.
If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed
(wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON
position, not the ACCESSORY position. Make certain the
transmission remains in NEUTRAL.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. The only approved method of towing with out the ignition key is
with a flat bed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
279
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE WITH A TOW DOLLEY
The manufacture does not recommend that you tow this
vehicle on a tow dolley. Vehicle damage may occur.
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on the
ground)
Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission, is only permitted within the limitations
described in this section.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
6
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
m 2.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
m 3.5L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
m 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
m Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 287
m Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
▫ Drive Belts — Check Condition And
Tensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
▫ Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
▫ Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
▫ Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
m Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
m Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
m Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
▫ A/C Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
▫ Power Steering — Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
▫ Front & Rear Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . . . 301
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
282
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Steering Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
▫ Cleaning The Center Console Cup
Holders — 300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
▫ Drive Shaft Universal Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
▫ Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders —
300C, 300 Touring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
m Power Distribution Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
▫ Front Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . 315
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
▫ Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . 307
▫ Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
▫ Brake Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
▫ Rear Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . 318
m Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
m Replacement Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
m Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
▫ Fuel System Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
▫ Front And Rear Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . 311
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,
Park/Turn Lamp, Inner Park Lamp, And Outer
Park Lamp – 300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,
And Park/Turn Lamp – 300C . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
▫ Backup Lamp, Side Marker Lamp, And
Tail/Stop Turn Lamp — 300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
283
▫ Tail/Stop, Tail, Turn Signal Lamp, And Backup
Lamp — 300C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
m Recommended Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
m Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
7
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
284
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2.7L ENGINE
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
285
3.5L ENGINE
7
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
286
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5.7L ENGINE
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
287
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy
and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before
any emissions tests can be performed.
If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
7
288
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states which have an I/M (Inspection and
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the
following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)
is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,
and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready
for testing.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal
bulb check.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery
replacement. If the OBD system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do
the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn off
the ignition key or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle’s OBD system is not ready and you
should not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or
start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD
system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
289
If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
DEALER SERVICE
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special
tools and equipment to perform all service operations in
an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your vehicle.
Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure
yourself.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation, you should have your
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M
station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on
with the engine running.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopart parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to insure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-Mopart parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
7
290
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level — 2.7L, 3.5L Engines
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before
starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
2.7L, 3.5L Engines
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
291
Checking Oil Level — 5.7L Engines
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before
starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding one quart of oil
when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range
will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range
on these engines.
5.7L Engines
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
292
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Taxi, Police or delivery service (commercial service).
CAUTION!
Operating the engine with the oil levels below the
safe zone, or operating with oil levels that exceed the
top of the safe zone by 25% may cause engine
damage.
Change Engine Oil
Road conditions and your kind of driving affects the
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the
following list to see if any apply to you.
• Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
• Stop and Go driving.
• Extensive engine idling.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
• Off-Road or desert operation.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
9Maintenance Schedules9 section of this manual.
If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil
at every interval shown on schedule 9A9 of the 9Maintenance Schedules9 section of this manual.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacture only
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet
the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard
MS-6395. Use Mopar or an equivalent oil meeting the
specification MS-6395.
• Trailer towing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacture only recommends
API Certified engine oils that
meet
the
requirements
of
DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Use Mopar or an
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
293
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.7L Engines
2.7L Engines
SAE 5W-30 and SAE 5W-20 engine oils are recommended for all operating temperatures. These engine
oils improve low temperature starting and vehicle fuel
economy. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for the
recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
294
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart — 3.5L Engines
SAE 10W-30 engine oil is preferred for use in 3.5L
Engines within the operating temperatures shown in the
engine oil viscosity chart. SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil is
allowed for use in the 3.5L Engine during cold weather
only to improve cold weather starting.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 5.7L Engines
The recommended engine oil viscosity for vehicles
equipped with the 5.7L engine is SAE 5W-20.
NOTE: Engine oils higher in viscosity may reduce fuel
economy in vehicles equipped with 5.7L engines.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided that the
recommended oil quality requirements are met and the
recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter
changes are followed.
Materials Added to Engine Oil
The manufacture strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
3.5L Engines
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your dealer, service station, or
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
governmental agency for advice on how and where used
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacture’s engines have a full-flow type oil filter.
Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of
replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to assure most efficient service.
Mopar Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil filter and
are recommended.
Drive Belts — Check Condition and Tensioner
Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic
tensioner. No belt tension adjustments are required.
However, belt and belt tensioner condition should be
inspected at the specified intervals, and replaced if required. See your authorized dealer for service.
At the mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule, all
belts and tensioner should be checked for condition.
Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure.
295
Belts should be inspected for evidence of cuts, cracks,
glazing, or frayed cords and replaced if there is indication
of damage which could result in belt failure. Low generator belt tension can cause battery failure.
Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interference between the belts and other engine components.
Spark Plugs
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine performance and emission control. New plugs should be installed at the specified mileage. The entire set should be
replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark
plug. Malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the catalytic converter. For proper type of replacement spark
plugs, refer to the “Vehicle Emission Control Information” label in the engine compartment.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Under normal driving conditions, replace the air filter at
the intervals shown on Schedule “A”. If, however, you
drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe conditions, the filter element should be inspected periodically and replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on
Schedule “B”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
296
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
Fuel Filter
A plugged fuel filter can cause stalling, limit the speed at
which a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting.
Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the
fuel tank, filter replacement may be necessary. See your
local dealer for service.
Catalytic Converter
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
297
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in
areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the
vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the
vehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Maintenance-Free Battery
The top of the MAINTENANCE-FREE battery is permanently sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is
periodic maintenance required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
298
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
engine compartment for jump starting.
NOTE: The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be replaced
with a battery of the same type (vented).
Battery Location
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
299
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while battery is in
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
300
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: NOTE: Air Conditioning systems found to be
contaminated with A/C System Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compressor Oil, or Refrigerants
not approved by the manufacturer, voids the warranty
for the Air Conditioning system.
A/C Air Filter
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger
side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When
installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation. To
replace the filter remove the access door in the cowl
screen by pressing the retaining clips. Slide the lid on the
filter adapter forward and down and remove used filter.
Install new filter with arrows pointing in the direction of
airflow, which is toward the rear of the vehicle (text and
arrows on the filter indicate this).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedules” section of this
manual for the recommended air conditioning filter
replacement intervals.
Power Steering — Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified
DaimlerChrysler Dealership.9
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and
Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front & Rear Suspension Ball Joints
The suspension ball joints should be inspected for external leakage or damage when other maintenance is performed.
Steering Linkage
The tie rod end ball joints should be inspected for
external leakage or damage when other maintenance is
performed.
Drive Shaft Universal Joints
Your vehicle has constant velocity universal joints. Periodic lubrication of these joints is not required. However,
the joint boots should be inspected for external leakage or
damage when other maintenance is performed. If leakage
or damage is evident, the universal joint boot and grease
should be replaced immediately.
Continued operation could result in failure of the universal joint due to water and dirt contamination of the
grease. This would require complete replacement of the
joint assembly.
301
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, doors, trunk and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching components to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopart Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield
should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
302
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
Windshield Washers
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment and should be checked for fluid
level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual
water.
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid
when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
303
Cooling System
Inspection
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, follow the preceding safety tips.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, turn
the ignition key to the OFF position. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any time
when the ignition key is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, don’t open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator is hot.
7
304
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Coolant Checks
Coolant protection checks should be made every 12
months (prior to the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant, refer
to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
for correct coolant type.
Check the cooling system hoses for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection at the
bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill
At the intervals shown in the appropriate maintenance
schedule, the system should be drained, flushed and
refilled.
If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount
of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old
antifreeze solution.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
CAUTION!
• Mixing of coolants other than the specified HOAT
coolant may result in decreased corrosion protection and engine damage that may not be covered
under the new vehicle warranty. If a non-HOAT
coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, it should be replaced with the specified
coolant as soon as possible.
• Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base
antifreeze products. Do not use additional rust
inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be
compatible with the radiator coolant and may plug
the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene
Glycol based coolants is not recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Coolant
When adding coolant, or refilling the system, a minimum
of 50% solution of ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant in
water should be used. Higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) are required if temperatures below 234°F
(237°C) are anticipated.
305
coolant pressure cap should be inspected and cleaned if
there is any accumulation of foreign material on the
sealing surfaces.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/antifreeze solution. The
use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of
corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
changes.
Coolant Pressure Cap
The coolant pressure cap must be fully tightened to
prevent loss of coolant, and to insure that coolant will
return to the coolant bottle from the overflow tank. The
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the coolant pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add coolant to the cooling system when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
coolant pressure cap to cool an overheated engine.
Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling
system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not
remove the coolant pressure cap while the system
is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
7
306
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children
do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open
containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine off and cold, the coolant level should be between
the ranges indicated on the bottle. Some darkening of the
coolant bottle will occur over time. This is normal.
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill. See your authorized dealer to properly fill
the cooling system.
Points to Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles of
operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front
of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of
moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the
thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to enter the
radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant bottle.
• Check coolant freeze point in the system.
• If frequent coolant additions are required, the cooling
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
• Maintain coolant concentration at 50% ethylene glycol
antifreeze (minimum) in water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant bottle hoses
are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator and the front of the A/C
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory cooling performance.
• Increasing engine speed at idle does not reduce coolant temperature! Put transmission in NEUTRAL and
let engine idle at normal engine idle speed.
Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber.
307
Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high
heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose
routing to be sure hoses do not come in contact with any
heat source or moving component which may cause heat
damage or mechanical wear.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
present.
Components should be replaced immediately if there is
any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure.
Brakes
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Suggested service intervals can be found in the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
308
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake And Power Steering Hoses
When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance,
inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of
heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasion, and excessive swelling
indicate deterioration of the rubber. Particular attention
should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest
to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
present.
NOTE: Often, fluid such as oil, power steering fluid,
and brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations to facilitate the assembly of hoses to couplings.
Therefore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not
necessarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of
hot fluid when systems are under pressure (during
vehicle operation), should be noted before a hose is
replaced based on leakage.
NOTE: Inspection of brake hoses should be performed
whenever the brake system is serviced and at every
engine oil change. Inspect hydraulic brake hoses for
surface cracking, scuffing, or worn spots. If there is any
evidence of cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, the hose
should be replaced immediately! Eventual deterioration
of the hose can take place resulting in a possibility of a
burst failure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.
You could have an accident. If you see any signs of
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
hoses replaced immediately.
Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid, refer
to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid type.
WARNING!
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
• Use of a brake fluid that has a lower initial boiling
point than the recommended MOPAR DOT 3
product or a brake fluid that is unidentified as to
FMVSS specification may result in sudden brake
failure during hard prolonged braking. You could
have an accident.
Brake Fluid Level Check
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing underhood services, or immediately if
the brake system warning light indicates system failure.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
309
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
310
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Transmission
CAUTION!
Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid, all brake seal components could be
damaged causing partial or complete brake failure.
Fuel System Hoses
Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are
designed with hoses and quick connect fittings which
have unique material characteristics to provide adequate
sealing and resist attack by deteriorated gasoline.
Fluid Level Check
Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not
required. For this reason the dipstick is omitted.
If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction, have
your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level.
You are urged to use only the manufacture specified
hoses with quick connect fittings, or their equivalent in
material and specification, in any fuel system servicing. It
is mandatory to replace any damaged hoses or quick
connect fittings that have been removed during service.
Care should be taken in installing quick connect fittings
to insure they are properly installed and fully connected.
See your authorized dealer for service.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than that
recommended by the manufacturer will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to the
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
section for correct fluid type.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your
authorized dealer immediately. Severe damage to the
transmission may occur. Your authorized dealer has
the proper tools to accurately adjust the fluid level.
Fluid and Filter Changes
Automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed as follows:
Maintenance schedule “A” — No change necessary.
Maintenance schedule “B” –Every 60,000 miles (96 000
km) change fluid and filter under the following conditions:
• Police, taxi, limousine, commercial type operation, or
trailer towing where the vehicle is driven regularly for
more than 45 minutes of continuous operation.
311
Front And Rear Wheel Bearings
Front and rear wheel bearings are permanently sealed.
No regular maintenance is required for these components.
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the
fluid and filter should be changed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
312
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
The most common causes are:
CAUTION!
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Special Care
Washing
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using a mild car wash soap, and
rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, wash it as soon as possible.
• Use Mopar auto polish to remove road film and stains
and to polish your vehicle. Take care never to scratch
the paint.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.
The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly
with mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To
remove heavy soil, select a nonabrasive, non-acidic
cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush or metal polishes. Only Mopar cleaners are
recommended. Do not use oven cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh
brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective finish.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
313
• Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to match the
color of your vehicle.
Interior Care
Use Mopar Fabric Cleaner to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with a mild detergent, then MOPAR
Vinyl Cleaner if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh
cleaners or Armorall. Use Mopar Vinyl Cleaner to clean
vinyl upholstery.
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
314
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with any commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric
defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped
with the radio antenna. Do not use scrapers or other
sharp instruments which may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders — 300
Perform the following steps to clean the center console
cup holders:
• Grab the center of the rubber portion of the cup holder
firmly and lift upward to remove.
• Soak the rubber cup holder liner in a mixture of
medium hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid
dish soap. Let soak for approximately one hour.
• After one hour pull the liner from the water and dip it
back into the water about six times. This will loosen
any remaining debris.
315
Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders —
300C, 300 Touring
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
with the cup holder in the center console.
NOTE: The 300 Touring, and 300C cup holder cannot be
removed.
Power Distribution Centers
Front Power Distribution Center
A power distribution center is located in the engine
compartment. This center contains fuses and relays.
• Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water.
Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the
outer surfaces with a clean soft cloth.
• Carefully tuck the front, followed by the rear, then side
edges of the cup holder into the center console.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
316
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Power Distribution Center Fuses
CAUTION!
• When installing the Power Distribution Center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the Power Distribution Center, and possibly result in a electrical
system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage
rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than
indicated may result in a dangerous electrical
system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit
that must be corrected.
Cavity
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
15 Amp
Dk. Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
25 Amp
Clear
15 Amp
Dk. Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
15 Amp
Dk. Blue
15 Amp
Dk. Blue
5 Amp
Orange
Circuits
Left High Beam Headlight
Right High Beam Headlight
Adjustable Pedal
Horn
Headlamp Washer — If
Equipped
Front Control Module (FCM)
Fog Lamp
Park Lamp
Non ABS Brakes
Starter
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Fuse
15 Amp
Dk. Blue
—
—
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
50 Amp
Red
Circuits
Auto Shutdown/Powertrain
Control Module (PCM)
—
—
Powertrain Control Module
Cavity
20
Injectors, Ignition Coils
23
Powertrain Control Module
24
25
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Valves
Windshield Wiper/Washer
26
21
22
27
Radiator Fan
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Fuse
20 Amp
Lt. Blue
50 Amp
Red
40 Amp
Green
50 Amp
Red
—
30 Amp
Pink
20 Amp
Lt. Blue
30 Amp
Pink
317
Circuits
Starter
ABS Pump Motor
Radiator Fan High/Low
High Intensity Lighting
—
Lighting Left High Beam/
Right Low Beam
Transmission
Lighting Left Low Beam/
Right High Beam
7
318
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Power Distribution Center
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• When installing the Power Distribution Center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the Power Distribution Center, and possibly result in a electrical
system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage
rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than
indicated may result in a dangerous electrical
system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit
that must be corrected.
Cavity
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Rear Power Distribution Center Fuses
Cavity
Fuse
Circuits
1
60 Amp
Ignition Off Draw
Clear
2
40 Amp
Battery
Green
12
13
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Fuse
—
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
20 Amp
Yellow
—
15 Amp
Dk. Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
25 Amp
C/BRKR
25 Amp
C/BRKR
30 Amp
C/BRKR
319
Circuits
—
Battery
Heated Seat/Steering Column
Fuel Pump
—
Ignition Start/Run - Start
Console Power Outlet
Rear Fog Lamp — If Equipped
Memory Module/Door Locks
Passenger Power Seat
Door Module Run/Acc/Delay
7
320
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
—
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
—
—
—
—
—
—
10 Amp
Red
Circuits
Sentry Key/Remote Keyless
Entry/Cluster
Brake Light (5.7L)
Power Outlet Trunk - if
equipped
—
Selectable Power Outlet
Stop Lamp
Rear Wiper — If Equipped
—
—
—
—
—
—
Airbag/Occupant Classification Module
Cavity
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
5 Amp
Orange
10 Amp
Red
—
—
—
—
5 Amp
Orange
20 Amp
Yellow
15 Amp
Dk. Blue
5 Amp
Orange
10 Amp
Red
Circuits
Curtain Airbag - if equipped
Sentry Key/Remote Keyless
Entry/Powertrain Control
Module Ignition Feed
Steering Column Module/
Power Mirrors - if equipped
—
—
—
—
Power Antenna/Garage Door
Opener/Ignition Delay
Radio/Navigation
Transmission
Analog Clock/Garage Door
Opener
Heated Mirror
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
40
41
42
43
44
Fuse
5 Amp
Orange
10 Amp
Red
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
20 Amp
Lt. Blue
Circuits
Power Mirror
Climate Control Module/
Headlamp Leveling — if
equipped/Rear Park Assist —
if equipped/Tire Pressure
Monitoring — if equipped
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Blower Motor
Rear Defroster
Audio Amplifier
321
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
You may:
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
322
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS — Interior
Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Overhead Console Reading Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Visor Vanity Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6220
Glove Box Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Door Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Shift Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JKLE14140
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your dealer for replacement instructions.
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
LIGHT BULBS — Exterior (300, 300 Touring)
Bulb
Number
Low Beam Headlamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006
High Beam Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Front Park/Turn Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3757AK
Front Inner Park Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194NA
Front Outer Park Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194NA
Front Fog Lamp—If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 9145/H10
(Serviced at Dealer)
Front Sidemarker . . . . . . . . . W5W (Serviced at Dealer)
Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Rear Sidemarker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Center High Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL). . . . . . . LED
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
LIGHT BULBS — Exterior (300C)
Bulb Number
Low Beam Headlamp (Standard Halogen) . . . . 9006XS
Low Beam Headlamp – High Intensity
Discharge (HID) . . . . . . . . . . . D1S (Serviced at Dealer)
High Beam Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Front Park/Turn Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157AK
Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . 9145/H10 (Serviced at Dealer)
Front Sidemarker . . . . . . . . . W5W (Serviced at Dealer)
Tail/Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Tail Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Center High Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL). . . . . . . LED
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
323
BULB REPLACEMENT
Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,
Park/Turn Lamp, Inner Park Lamp, and Outer
Park Lamp – 300
• Open the hood.
• Twist the appropriate bulb socket assembly counterclockwise and pull out. Pull the bulb out of the socket
assembly.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs on driver’s side headlamp assembly.
• Replace the bulb and push into socket assembly.
Reinstall the socket assembly, and turn clockwise.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
324
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, and
Park/Turn Lamp – 300C
High Intensity Discharge Headlights (HID) — If
Equipped
The headlights are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlight switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlight bulb
yourself. If a headlight bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlights when the
headlight switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
325
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge Headlights (HID), when the headlights are turned
on there is a blue hue to the lights. This diminishes and
becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as
the system charges.
• Open the hood.
• Twist the appropriate bulb socket assembly counterclockwise and pull out. Pull the bulb out of the socket
assembly.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs on driver’s side headlamp assembly.
• Replace the bulb and push into socket assembly.
Reinstall the socket assembly, and turn clockwise.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
326
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Backup Lamp, Side Marker Lamp, and Tail/Stop
Turn Lamp — 300
1. Open the Trunk.
2. Remove two fasteners from the back of the tail lamp
assembly.
3. Pull back the trunk liner.
4. Remove the remaining fastener from the back of the
tail lamp assembly.
5. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Disconnect the electrical connector.
327
7. Pull tail lamp assembly clear from vehicle to access
bulbs. Turn bulb sockets counter-clockwise to remove.
7
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
328
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
8. Pull the appropriate bulb to remove it from the socket.
9. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
tail light assembly.
10. Close the trunk.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Tail/Stop, Tail, Turn Signal Lamp, and Backup
Lamp — 300C
1. Open the Trunk.
2. Remove two fasteners from the back of the tail lamp
assembly.
329
3. Pull back the trunk liner.
4. Remove the remaining fastener from the back of the
tail lamp assembly.
5. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side.
6. Disconnect the electrical connector.
7
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
330
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
7. Pull tail lamp assembly clear from vehicle to access
bulbs. Turn bulb sockets counter-clockwise to remove.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
331
8. Pull the appropriate bulb to remove it from the socket.
9. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
tail light assembly.
10. Close the trunk.
7
3. Replace the bulb and reinstall the bulb and socket
assembly.
4. Reattach the light to the rear fascia.
License Lamp
1. Remove the screws securing the light to the rear fascia.
2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly and pull the
bulb from the socket.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
332
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
Fuel (approximate)
2.7 Liter Engines (87 Octane)
3.5 Liter Engines (89 Octane)
5.7 Liter Engines (89 Octane)
Engine Oil-With Filter
2.7 Liter Engines (SAE 5W-30,
API Certified)
3.5 Liter Engines (SAE 10W-30,
API Certified)
5.7 Liter Engines (SAE 5W-20,
API Certified)
U.S.
Metric
18 gallons
18 gallons
19 gallons
68 liters
6.0 qts.
5.7 liters
6.0 qts.
5.7 liters
7.0 qts.
6.6 liters
68 liters
71 liters
Cooling System *
2.7 Liter Engines (Mopart
9.5 qts 9.0 liters
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/
100,000 Mile Formula)
3.5 Liter Engines (Mopart
10.3 qts
9.75
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/
liters
100,000 Mile Formula)
5.7 Liter Engines (Mopart
14.0 qts
13.3
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/
liters
100,000 Mile Formula)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to
MAX level.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
333
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil (2.7 Liter)
Engine Oil (3.5 Liter)
Engine Oil (5.7 Liter)
Spark Plugs
Oil Filter (2.7 Liter)
Oil Filter (3.5 Liter)
Oil Filter (5.7 Liter)
Fuel Selection (2.7 Liter)
Fuel Selection (3.5 Liter)
Fuel Selection (5.7 Liter)
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Mopart Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology)
Use API Certified engine oil. SAE 5W-30 is recommended. Refer to the engine oil viscosity chart for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler
Material Standard MS-6395.
Use API Certified engine oil. SAE 10W-30 is recommended. Refer to the engine oil viscosity chart for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler
Material Standard MS-6395.
Use API Certified engine oil. SAE 5W-20 is recommended. Refer to the engine oil viscosity chart for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler
Material Standard MS-6395.
Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine compartment.
Mopart 05281090 or equiv.
Mopart 05281090 or equiv.
Mopart 05281090 or equiv.
87 Octane
89 Octane
89 Octane
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
7
334
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Rear Axle
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Mopart ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Mopart DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used. Use only recommended
brake fluids.
Mopart ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Mopart SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
m Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 336
▫ Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
m Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
▫ Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 C
S
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
336
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold
type must be done at the times or mileages specified to
assure the continued proper functioning of the emission
control system. These, and all other maintenance services
included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent mainS tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
C conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip
H driving.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
There are two maintenance schedules that show the
required service for your vehicle.
First is Schedule “B”. It is for vehicles that are operated
under the conditions that are listed below and at the
beginning of the schedule. Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter every 60,000 miles (96 000 km) if
the vehicle is usually operated under one or more of the
conditions marked with an L.
Inspection and service also should be done any time a
malfunction is suspected.
• Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the
emission control devices and systems on your vehicle
may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part which has
been certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of
California, California Air Resources Board regulations.
• Extensive engine idling.
• Stop and go driving.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C).
• Trailer towing.L
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).L
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
• Off-road or desert operation.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
9Maintenance Schedules9 section of this manual.
NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions
listed for Schedule 9B9.
Second is Schedule “A”. It is for vehicles that are not
operated under any of the conditions listed under Schedule 9B9.
Use the schedule that best describes your driving conditions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the
interval that occurs first.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
337 M
At Each Stop for Fuel
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
• Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if E
S
required.
Once a Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
• Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and transmission and add as needed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
338
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
• Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
operation.
• Check rubber seals on each side of the radiator for
proper fit.
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the brake hoses.
• Inspect the CV joints and front and rear suspension
components.
• Check the automatic transmission fluid level.
• Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
• Inspect the exhaust system.
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
SCHEDULE “B”
SCHEDULE “B”
Follow schedule “B” if you usually operate your vehicle
under one or more of the following conditions. Change
the automatic transmission fluid and filter every 60,000
miles (96 000 km) if the vehicle is usually operated under
one or more of the conditions marked with an L.
• Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).
• Stop and go driving.
339 M
A
I
N
• Taxi, police or delivery service (commercial ser- T
E
vices).L
N
A
• Off-road or desert operation.
N
C
• If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol) E
• Trailer towing.L
fuel.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
9Maintenance Schedules9 section of this manual.
• Extensive engine idling.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km).
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 340 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
A Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if reN
C quired.*
E Replace the air cleaner filter. *
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
3,000
(5 000)
X
X
6,000
(10 000)
X
X
9,000
(14 000)
X
X
12,000
(19 000)
X
X
15,000
(24 000)
X
18,000
(29 000)
X
X
X
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
X
X
X
X
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.*
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engine.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV
valve. *
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
21,000
(34 000)
X
X
24,000
(38 000)
X
X
27,000
(43 000)
X
X
30,000
(48 000)
X
33,000
(53 000)
X
X
36,000
(58 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
341 M
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
M 342 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
A Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if reN
C quired.*
E Replace the air cleaner filter. *
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
39,000
(62 000)
X
X
42,000
(67 000)
X
X
45,000
(72 000)
X
48,000
(77 000)
X
X
X
X
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
Replace the rear axle fluid.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
51,000
(82 000)
X
X
54,000
(86 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.*
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engine.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt
and tensioner. Replace if required.
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV
valve. * ‡
Replace the power steering fluid.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and
filter.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
57,000
(91 000)
X
X
60,000
(96 000)
X
63,000
66,000
69,000
(101 000) (106 000) (110 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
72,000
(115 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
343 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
X
X
M 344 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
A Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if reN
C quired.*
E Replace the air cleaner filter. *
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engine.
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV
valve. * ‡
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
75,000
78,000
81,000
84,000
87,000
(120 000) (125 000) (130 000) (134 000) (139 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
90,000
(144 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.*
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
Flush and replace the engine coolant.
Replace the engine timing belt (Federal Emissions). 3.5L Engine
Replace the engine timing belt (California
Emissions). 3.5L Engine
Replace the spark plugs. 2.7L, 3.5L Engines.
Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt
and tensioner. Replace if required.
Change the rear axle fluid.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
93,000
96,000
99,000
100,000
102,000
(149 000) (154 000) (158 000) (160 000) (163 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
105,000
(168 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
345 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
346
SCHEDULE “B”
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emissions warranty.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
SCHEDULE “A”
347 M
SCHEDULE “A”
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.*
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engine.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
6,000
(10 000)
[6]
X
X
12,000
(19 000)
[12]
X
X
18,000
(29 000)
[18]
X
X
24,000
(38 000)
[24]
X
X
30,000
(48 000)
[30]
X
36,000
(58 000)
[36]
X
X
X
X
X
X
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 348 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N [Months]
A Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
C Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if
E required.*
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
42,000
(67 000)
[42]
X
X
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engine.
Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt
and tensioner. Replace if required.
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months
or 102,000 miles.
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV
valve. *
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
48,000
(77 000)
[48]
X
X
54,000
(86 000)
[54]
X
X
60,000
(96 000)
[60]
X
66,000
72,000
(106 000) (115 000)
[66]
[72]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “A”
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if
required.*
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt
and tensioner. Replace if required.
Replace the spark plugs. 2.7L, 3.5L Engines.
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engine.
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV
valve. *‡
Replace the engine timing belt (Federal
Emissions equipped vehicles only). 3.5L Engine
Replace the engine timing belt (California
Emissions equipped vehicles only). 3.5L Engine
78,000
(125 000)
[78]
X
X
84,000
(134 000)
[84]
X
X
90,000
96,000
100,000
(144 000) (154 000) (160 000)
[90]
[96]
X
X
X
102,000
(163 000)
[102]
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
X
X
X
X
8
X
X
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
349 M
M 350 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N [Months]
A Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60
N
C months or 102,000 miles.
E Replace the air conditioning filter.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Rotate the tires.
78,000
(125 000)
[78]
84,000
(134 000)
[84]
X
X
X
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emissions warranty.
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
90,000
96,000
100,000
(144 000) (154 000) (160 000)
[90]
[96]
X
X
X
102,000
(163 000)
[102]
X
X
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
m Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
m Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
m Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
m Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
m If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
m Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
m Mopart Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
9
352
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident,
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items, and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable
to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in
your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
Your selling dealer is best equipped and most anxious to
provide prompt resolution for any warranty issue or
related matter that you may experience. The manufacturer’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to assure
your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
The manufacturer has empowered its dealers to make
warranty and repair decisions that ensure you are not
inconvenienced. There is no need for you to wait for a
decision from the manufacturer. If a special circumstance
occurs that requires information from the manufacturer,
we have asked the dealer’s service management to make
the contact on your behalf.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the dealership. They
want to know if you need assistance.
• If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you
may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Center should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Dealership name
353
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer
Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone —(800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
9
• Vehicle identification number
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
354
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after your manufacturer’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to
your contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for your
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about your service
contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
355
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See your manufacturer’s Warranty Information Booklet for
information on warranty coverage and transfer of warranty.
9
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
356
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
MOPART PARTS
Mopart fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from your dealer. They will help you keep your
vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you
believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, and the
manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in Washington DC area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Dept. of
Transportation, Washington DC 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
the Hotline.
In Canada:
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).
• Owner’s Manuals.
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
safety tips.
• Service Manuals.
These comprehensive service manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge
of the vehicle, system and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams
and charts.
357
Call Toll Free at 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.) or 1–800–387–1143
(Canada)
Or
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.
Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,
these practical manuals make it easy for students and
technicians to find and fix problems on computercontrolled vehicle systems and features. They show
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,
using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list
of all tools and equipment.
www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com
www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
or
9
358
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following describes the tire grading categories established by the National highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s
manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall
of the tires on your car.
Traction Grades
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are A, B, and
C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in Addition to These Grades.
WARNING!
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1
1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
The traction grade is based on braking (straightahead) traction tests and does not include cornering
(turning) performance.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
359
WARNING!
The temperature grade is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup
and possible tire failure.
9
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX
10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
362
INDEX
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108,302
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203,300
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41,42
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41,48,58,142
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Airbag, Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37,43
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Antifreeze Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . 304,305,332
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Anti-Theft Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,18
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Automatic Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Selection Of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . 209,214,311
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . . 213
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216,222
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX
Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Keyless Transmitter Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 23
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274,298
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224,307
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309,334
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . 57
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
363
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Cassette Tape and Player Maintenance . . . . . . . 192
Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159,164,175
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,52,54,55
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Compact Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
364
INDEX
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Coolant Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Selection of Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304,332,333
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129,315
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,196,201
Delay Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Disposal
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Drive Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Drive Shaft Universal Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Driver’s Seat Glide Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Electronic Stability Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Electronic Vehicle Information Center . . . . . . . . 147
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX
Emergency, In Case of
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . 288,336
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285,286
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290,291
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285,286
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250,332
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290,332,333
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292,332
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . 43
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
365
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,253,303
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203,300
Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295,333
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Flat Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Fluid Level Checks
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300,334
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105,140
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
366
INDEX
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250,333
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250,332
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gas Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
119
254
250
251
251
143
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . 145
. . . . 140
. . . . 141
. . . . 210
14,23,247
. . . . 314
. . . . 257
. . . . 257
Hands-Free Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . 106
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104,107
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Homelink Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307,310
Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138,139,140
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Intermittent Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 267
266,269
. . . 269
. . . 273
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key, Sentry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
367
14
13
12
12
20
11
37
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Latch Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Latches
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,101
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41,58,142
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322,323
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
368
INDEX
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105,140
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103,324
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . 104,107
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322,323
Service Engine Soon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103,105
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256,257
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Locks
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Light Duty Schedule 9B9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Schedule 9A9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Schedule 9B9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Malfunction Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 146,288
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Memory Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289,356
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
369
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292,332
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293,294,332
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . 287,288
Opener, Garage Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Operator Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Overhead Travel Information Center . . . . . . . . . 118
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144,264
Owner’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,356
Occupant Classification System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Octane Rating, Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290,333
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290,291
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295,333
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Parking On Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Phone, Hands-Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . 232
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
370
INDEX
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Steering, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . 109
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . 119,123,154
Programming Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119,123
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159,164,175
Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159,164,175,194
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Radio, Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Remote Sound System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Remote Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
INDEX
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . 34
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,55
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Glide-To-Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
371
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Selection of Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Self-Sealing Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Sentry Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Service Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158,160,166,176
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Snow Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
372
INDEX
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Steering
Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227,300
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130,321
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203,321
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Sulfur in Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Sunglass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . 37
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Temperature Control, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . 143,265
Theft Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . 232
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,236,358
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265,269
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266,269
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232,233
Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
INDEX
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228,236
Self-Sealing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Trailering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Traction Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Selection of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209,214
373
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Transaxle
Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105,140
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
358
301
119
250
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233,256,257
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
:
10
374
INDEX
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203,321
Vehicle Theft Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108,302
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27,126
Window Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37,43
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197,203
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196,201
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106,302
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby
: